EC - PDF Text Files
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION
EC
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CONTENTS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ....................................8
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................8
PRECAUTIONS .............................................................14
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″.............14
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of Engine and A/T.........................................14
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System ..................15
Precautions ................................................................16
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...................17
PREPARATION .............................................................18
Special Service Tools ................................................18
Commercial Service Tools .........................................18
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
SYSTEM.........................................................................20
Engine Control Component Parts Location...............20
Circuit Diagram ..........................................................24
System Diagram ........................................................25
Vacuum Hose Drawing ..............................................26
System Chart .............................................................27
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...............................................28
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .......................28
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ..................................30
Air Conditioning Cut Control......................................31
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
speed) ........................................................................32
Evaporative Emission System ...................................32
Positive Crankcase Ventilation ..................................38
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ...................................39
Fuel Pressure Release ..............................................39
Fuel Pressure Check .................................................39
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check ................................40
Injector .......................................................................41
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..........42
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment .................................................................43
Idle Air Volume Learning ...........................................58
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................60
Introduction ................................................................60
Two Trip Detection Logic ...........................................60
Emission-related Diagnostic Information ...................61
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)..............................75
OBD System Operation Chart ...................................76
CONSULT-II ...............................................................82
Generic Scan Tool (GST) ..........................................96
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION..................98
Introduction ................................................................98
Work Flow................................................................100
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION .........102
Basic Inspection.......................................................102
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION .............................................................118
DTC Inspection Priority Chart..................................118
Fail-safe Chart .........................................................119
Symptom Matrix Chart.............................................120
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................124
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................126
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................129
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE ..138
Description ...............................................................138
Testing Condition .....................................................138
Inspection Procedure...............................................138
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................139
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT.....................................................................142
Description ...............................................................142
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................142
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........143
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................143
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..................144
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)......152
Component Description ...........................................152
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................152
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................152
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................153
Possible Cause........................................................153
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................153
Overall Function Check ...........................................155
Wiring Diagram ........................................................156
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................157
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR ........160
Component Description ...........................................160
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................160
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................160
Possible Cause........................................................161
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................161
Wiring Diagram ........................................................162
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................163
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR ......................................................................166
Component Description ...........................................166
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................166
Possible Cause........................................................166
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................166
Wiring Diagram ........................................................168
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................169
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT) .......................................171
Component Description ...........................................171
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................171
Possible Cause........................................................172
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................172
Wiring Diagram ........................................................173
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................174
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ...........176
Description ...............................................................176
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................176
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................177
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................177
Possible Cause........................................................177
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................178
Wiring Diagram ........................................................182
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................183
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (ECTS) .........................................................189
Description ...............................................................189
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................189
Possible Cause........................................................190
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................190
Wiring Diagram ........................................................191
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................192
(Cont’d)
DTC P0130, P0150 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
(FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (CIRCUIT) ..................194
Component Description ...........................................194
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................194
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................194
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................195
Possible Cause........................................................195
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................196
Overall Function Check ...........................................196
Wiring Diagram ........................................................198
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................200
DTC P0131, P0151 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
(FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING) .............................................................204
Component Description ...........................................204
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................204
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................204
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................205
Possible Cause........................................................205
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................205
Overall Function Check ...........................................206
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................207
DTC P0132, P0152 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
(FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING) .............................................................212
Component Description ...........................................212
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................212
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................212
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................213
Possible Cause........................................................213
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................213
Overall Function Check ...........................................214
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................215
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
(FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (RESPONSE
MONITORING) .............................................................220
Component Description ...........................................220
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................220
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................220
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................221
Possible Cause........................................................221
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................222
Overall Function Check ...........................................223
Wiring Diagram ........................................................224
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................226
DTC P0134, P0154 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
(FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (HIGH VOLTAGE)......233
Component Description ...........................................233
EC-2
CONTENTS
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................233
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................233
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................234
Possible Cause........................................................234
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................234
Wiring Diagram ........................................................236
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................238
DTC P0135, P0155 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
HEATER (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2).....................242
Description ...............................................................242
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................242
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................242
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................243
Possible Cause........................................................243
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................243
Wiring Diagram ........................................................244
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................246
DTC P0137, P0157 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
(REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING) .............................................................249
Component Description ...........................................249
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................249
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................249
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................249
Possible Cause........................................................250
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................250
Overall Function Check ...........................................250
Wiring Diagram ........................................................252
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................254
DTC P0138, P0158 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
(REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING) .............................................................259
Component Description ...........................................259
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................259
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................259
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................259
Possible Cause........................................................260
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................260
Overall Function Check ...........................................260
Wiring Diagram ........................................................262
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................264
DTC P0139, P0159 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
(REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (RESPONSE
MONITORING) .............................................................269
Component Description ...........................................269
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................269
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................269
(Cont’d)
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................269
Possible Cause........................................................270
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................270
Overall Function Check ...........................................270
Wiring Diagram ........................................................272
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................274
DTC P0140, P0160 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
(REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (HIGH VOLTAGE)........279
Component Description ...........................................279
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................279
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................279
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................279
Possible Cause........................................................280
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................280
Overall Function Check ...........................................280
Wiring Diagram ........................................................282
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................284
DTC P0141, P0161 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
HEATER (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2).......................288
Description ...............................................................288
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................288
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................288
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................289
Possible Cause........................................................289
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................289
Wiring Diagram ........................................................291
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................293
DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2)
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (LEAN).......296
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................296
Possible Cause........................................................296
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................296
Wiring Diagram ........................................................298
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................300
DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2)
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (RICH)........304
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................304
Possible Cause........................................................304
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................304
Wiring Diagram ........................................................306
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................308
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE
SENSOR ......................................................................311
Component Description ...........................................311
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................311
Possible Cause........................................................311
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................312
Wiring Diagram ........................................................313
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................314
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-3
CONTENTS
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE
ENRICHMENT PROTECTION.....................................316
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................316
Possible Cause........................................................316
Overall Function Check ...........................................316
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................318
Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................321
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER
MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE ...............322
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................322
Possible Cause........................................................322
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................323
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................323
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) ...........................330
Component Description ...........................................330
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................330
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................330
Possible Cause........................................................330
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................330
Wiring Diagram ........................................................332
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................333
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CKPS) (POS) ..............................................................336
Component Description ...........................................336
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................336
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................337
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................337
Possible Cause........................................................337
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................338
Wiring Diagram ........................................................339
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................340
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CMPS) (PHASE).........................................................344
Component Description ...........................................344
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................344
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................344
Possible Cause........................................................345
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................345
Wiring Diagram ........................................................346
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................347
DTC P0420 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0430 (LEFT
BANK, -B2) THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION...349
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................349
Possible Cause........................................................349
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................350
Overall Function Check ...........................................350
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................351
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL
LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)................................354
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................354
Possible Cause........................................................354
(Cont’d)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................356
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................357
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT).................369
Description ...............................................................369
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................369
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................370
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................370
Possible Cause........................................................370
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................371
Wiring Diagram ........................................................372
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................373
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) ......376
Component Description ...........................................376
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................376
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................376
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................376
Possible Cause........................................................377
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................377
Wiring Diagram ........................................................378
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................379
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ..............383
Component Description ...........................................383
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................383
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................383
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................384
Possible Cause........................................................384
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................384
Wiring Diagram ........................................................386
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................387
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS
LEAK)...........................................................................396
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................396
Possible Cause........................................................396
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................398
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................399
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION
(SLOSH).......................................................................409
Component Description ...........................................409
On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................409
Possible Cause........................................................409
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................409
Wiring Diagram ........................................................410
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................411
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION .......413
Component Description ...........................................413
On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................413
EC-4
CONTENTS
Possible Cause........................................................413
Overall Function Check ...........................................413
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT ...........415
Component Description ...........................................415
On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................415
Possible Cause........................................................415
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................415
Wiring Diagram ........................................................416
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................417
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) .........419
Component Description ...........................................419
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................419
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................419
Possible Cause........................................................420
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................420
Overall Function Check ...........................................421
Wiring Diagram ........................................................422
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................423
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE ...............424
Description ...............................................................424
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................425
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................425
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................425
Possible Cause........................................................425
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................425
Wiring Diagram ........................................................427
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................428
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION
SWITCH .......................................................................433
Component Description ...........................................433
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................433
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................433
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................433
Possible Cause........................................................433
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................434
Overall Function Check ...........................................434
Wiring Diagram ........................................................436
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................437
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE..................442
System Description..................................................442
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................442
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................442
Possible Cause........................................................442
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................442
Wiring Diagram ........................................................444
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................445
DTC P0605 ECM .........................................................446
Component Description ...........................................446
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................446
(Cont’d)
Possible Cause........................................................446
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................446
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................447
DTC P1110 (RIGHT, -B1), P1135 (LEFT, -B2)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL ..........................448
Description ...............................................................448
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................448
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................449
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................450
Possible Cause........................................................450
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................451
DTC P1111 (RIGHT, -B1), P1136 (LEFT, -B2)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE (CIRCUIT)........................................................453
Component Description ...........................................453
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................453
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................453
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................454
Possible Cause........................................................454
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................454
Wiring Diagram ........................................................455
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................457
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE......................................................460
Description ...............................................................460
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................461
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................461
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................461
Possible Cause........................................................462
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................462
Wiring Diagram ........................................................464
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................465
DTC P1140 (RIGHT, -B1), P1145 (LEFT, -B2)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION
SENSOR (CIRCUIT) ....................................................484
Component Description ...........................................484
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................484
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................485
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................485
Possible Cause........................................................486
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................486
Wiring Diagram ........................................................487
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................489
DTC P1148 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P1168 (LEFT
BANK, -B2) CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ...................493
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................493
Possible Cause........................................................493
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................493
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-5
CONTENTS
Overall Function Check ...........................................494
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................494
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
VACUUM CHECK SWITCH.........................................495
Component Description ...........................................495
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................495
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................495
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................496
Possible Cause........................................................496
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................496
Wiring Diagram ........................................................497
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................498
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL...................................501
Component Description ...........................................501
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................501
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................501
Possible Cause........................................................502
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................502
Wiring Diagram ........................................................503
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................506
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CKPS) (REF) ..............................................................512
Component Description ...........................................512
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................512
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................512
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................513
Possible Cause........................................................513
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................513
Wiring Diagram ........................................................515
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................516
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CKPS) (POS) (COG) ..................................................519
Component Description ...........................................519
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................519
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................520
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................520
Possible Cause........................................................520
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................521
Wiring Diagram ........................................................522
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................523
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY
SMALL LEAK) .............................................................528
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................528
Possible Cause........................................................528
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................529
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................531
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...................................543
Description ...............................................................543
(Cont’d)
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................543
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................544
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................544
Possible Cause........................................................544
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................545
Wiring Diagram ........................................................546
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................547
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CLOSE).........555
Component Description ...........................................555
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................555
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................555
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................555
Possible Cause........................................................556
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................556
Wiring Diagram ........................................................557
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................558
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW
MONITORING ..............................................................563
System Description..................................................563
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................563
Possible Cause........................................................563
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................564
Overall Function Check ...........................................565
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................566
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN)...........575
Component Description ...........................................575
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................575
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................575
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................575
Possible Cause........................................................576
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................576
Overall Function Check ...........................................577
Wiring Diagram ........................................................578
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................579
DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
(GROUND SIGNAL) ....................................................584
Component Description ...........................................584
On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................584
Possible Cause........................................................584
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................584
Wiring Diagram ........................................................585
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................586
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS
VALVE (CIRCUIT)........................................................587
Description ...............................................................587
EC-6
CONTENTS
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................587
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................587
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................588
Possible Cause........................................................588
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................588
Wiring Diagram ........................................................589
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................590
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS
VALVE..........................................................................593
Description ...............................................................593
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................593
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................593
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................594
Possible Cause........................................................594
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................594
Overall Function Check ...........................................595
Wiring Diagram ........................................................596
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................597
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION
LINE .............................................................................605
Component Description ...........................................605
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................605
Possible Cause........................................................605
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................605
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP)
SWITCH .......................................................................606
Component Description ...........................................606
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................606
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................606
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................606
Possible Cause........................................................606
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................607
Overall Function Check ...........................................608
Wiring Diagram ........................................................609
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................610
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
(VIAS)...........................................................................613
Description ...............................................................613
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................614
Wiring Diagram ........................................................615
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................616
INJECTOR ...................................................................619
Component Description ...........................................619
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................619
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................619
Wiring Diagram ........................................................620
(Cont’d)
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................621
START SIGNAL...........................................................624
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................624
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................624
Wiring Diagram ........................................................625
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................626
FUEL PUMP.................................................................628
System Description..................................................628
Component Description ...........................................628
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................628
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................629
Wiring Diagram ........................................................630
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................631
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.........637
Component Description ...........................................637
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................637
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................637
Wiring Diagram ........................................................638
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................639
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ......................642
Description ...............................................................642
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................642
Wiring Diagram ........................................................643
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................644
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL.....................................646
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................646
Wiring Diagram ........................................................647
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................650
MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ............................653
Wiring Diagram ........................................................653
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......654
Fuel Pressure Regulator..........................................654
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing................................654
Mass Air Flow Sensor..............................................654
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ......................654
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater (front) .................654
Fuel Pump ...............................................................654
IACV-AAC Valve ......................................................654
Injector .....................................................................654
Resistor....................................................................654
Throttle Position Sensor ..........................................655
Calculated Load Value.............................................655
Intake Air Temperature Sensor................................655
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater (rear) ..................655
Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) ..........................655
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor ...............................655
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .......................655
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-7
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
NAEC0001
ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC
NAEC0001S01
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
Reference page
Unable to access ECM
—
EC-119
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC
P0105
EC-160
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0110
EC-166
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
AT-120
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
P0732
AT-126
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
AT-132
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
AT-138
A/T COMM LINE
P0600*2
EC-442
A/T DIAG COMM LINE
P1605
EC-605
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
AT-153
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
AT-105
CAM PS/CIRC (PHS)
P0340
EC-344
CLOSED LOOP-B1
P1148
EC-493
CLOSED LOOP-B2
P1168
EC-493
CLOSED TP SW/CIRC
P0510
EC-433
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3
P0115
EC-171
*COOLANT T SEN/CIRC
P0125
EC-189
CPS/CIRC (POS) COG
P1336
EC-519
CPS/CIRCUIT (POS)
P0335
EC-336
CPS/CIRCUIT (REF)
P1335
EC-512
CYL 1 MISFIRE
P0301
EC-322
CYL 2 MISFIRE
P0302
EC-322
CYL 3 MISFIRE
P0303
EC-322
CYL 4 MISFIRE
P0304
EC-322
CYL 5 MISFIRE
P0305
EC-322
CYL 6 MISFIRE
P0306
EC-322
ECM
P0605
EC-446
ENGINE SPEED SIG
P0725
ENG OVER TEMP
P0217
EC-316
ENG OVER TEMP
P1217
LC-25
EVAP GROSS LEAK
P0455
EC-396
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
P1447
EC-563
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0450
EC-383
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P0440
EC-354
EVAP VERY SMALL LEAK
P1441
EC-528
EC-8
AT-116
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
GI
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
Reference page
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0464
EC-415
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P1464
EC-584
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
P0461
EC-413
FUEL LV SE (SLOSH)
P0460
EC-409
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1
P0171
EC-296
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK2
P0174
EC-296
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1
P0172
EC-304
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK2
P0175
EC-304
FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0180
EC-311
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
P0135
EC-242
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
P0155
EC-242
HO2S1 (B1)
P0130
EC-194
HO2S1 (B1)
P0131
EC-204
HO2S1 (B1)
P0132
EC-212
HO2S1 (B1)
P0133
EC-220
HO2S1 (B1)
P0134
EC-233
HO2S1 (B2)
P0150
EC-194
HO2S1 (B2)
P0151
EC-204
HO2S1 (B2)
P0152
EC-212
HO2S1 (B2)
P0153
EC-220
HO2S1 (B2)
P0154
EC-233
HO2S2 (B1)
P0137
EC-249
HO2S2 (B1)
P0138
EC-259
HO2S2 (B1)
P0139
EC-269
HO2S2 (B1)
P0140
EC-279
HO2S2 (B2)
P0157
EC-249
HO2S2 (B2)
P0158
EC-259
HO2S2 (B2)
P0159
EC-269
HO2S2 (B2)
P0160
EC-279
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0141
EC-288
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0161
EC-288
IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC
P0505
EC-424
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY
P1320
EC-501
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B1
P1140
EC-484
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2
P1145
EC-484
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
P1110
EC-448
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
P1135
EC-448
EC-9
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
Reference page
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
P1111
EC-453
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2
P1136
EC-453
P0325*2
EC-330
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
L/PRES SOL/CIRC
P0745
AT-162
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3
P0100
EC-152
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
P0300
EC-322
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1610 - P1615*2
EL-352
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000
—
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
P1760
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
P1706
EC-606
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
AT-99
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0443
EC-369
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P1444
EC-543
SFT SOL A/CIRC*3
P0750
AT-168
SFT SOL B/CIRC*3
P0755
AT-172
SWIRL CONT SOL/V
P1130
EC-460
SWL CON VC SW/CIRC
P1165
EC-495
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
P0740
AT-148
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3
P1705
AT-176
TRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3
P0120
EC-176
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
P0420
EC-349
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
P0430
EC-349
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V
P1491
EC-593
VC/V BYPASS/V
P1490
EC-587
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4
P0500
EC-419
VEH SPD SEN/CIR A/T*4
P0720
AT-111
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P0446
EC-376
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1446
EC-555
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1448
EC-575
AT-185
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II only.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
NOTE:
I
Regarding R50 models, “-B1” and “BK1” indicate right bank and “-B2” and “BK2” indicate left bank.
I
Bank 1 (-B1 or BK1) includes No. 1 cylinder.
EC-10
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC
=NAEC0001S02
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
—
Unable to access ECM
Reference page
GI
MA
EC-119
P0000
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0100
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3
EC-152
P0105
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC
EC-160
P0110
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC
EC-166
P0115
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3
EC-171
P0120
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3
EC-176
P0125
*COOLANT T SEN/CIRC
EC-189
P0130
HO2S1 (B1)
EC-194
P0131
HO2S1 (B1)
EC-204
P0132
HO2S1 (B1)
EC-212
P0133
HO2S1 (B1)
EC-220
P0134
HO2S1 (B1)
EC-233
P0135
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
EC-242
P0137
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-249
P0138
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-259
P0139
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-269
P0140
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-279
P0141
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
EC-288
P0150
HO2S1 (B2)
EC-194
P0151
HO2S1 (B2)
EC-204
P0152
HO2S1 (B2)
EC-212
P0153
HO2S1 (B2)
EC-220
P0154
HO2S1 (B2)
EC-233
P0155
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
EC-242
P0157
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-249
P0158
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-259
P0159
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-269
P0160
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-279
P0161
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
EC-288
P0171
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1
EC-296
P0172
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1
EC-304
P0174
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK2
EC-296
P0175
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK2
EC-304
P0180
FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC
EC-311
—
EC-11
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
Reference page
P0217
ENG OVER TEMP
EC-316
P0300
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
EC-322
P0301
CYL 1 MISFIRE
EC-322
P0302
CYL 2 MISFIRE
EC-322
P0303
CYL 3 MISFIRE
EC-322
P0304
CYL 4 MISFIRE
EC-322
P0305
CYL 5 MISFIRE
EC-322
P0306
CYL 6 MISFIRE
EC-322
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-330
P0335
CPS/CIRCUIT (POS)
EC-336
P0340
CAM PS/CIRC (PHS)
EC-344
P0420
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
EC-349
P0430
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
EC-349
P0440
EVAP SMALL LEAK
EC-354
P0443
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-369
P0446
VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-376
P0450
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-383
P0455
EVAP GROSS LEAK
EC-396
P0460
FUEL LV SE (SLOSH)
EC-409
P0461
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
EC-413
P0464
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
EC-415
P0500
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4
EC-419
P0505
IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC
EC-424
P0510
CLOSED TP SW/CIRC
EC-433
A/T COMM LINE
EC-442
P0605
ECM
EC-446
P0705
PNP SW/CIRC
AT-99
P0710
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
AT-105
P0720
VEH SPD SEN/CIR A/T*4
AT-111
P0725
ENGINE SPEED SIG
AT-116
P0731
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
AT-120
P0732
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
AT-126
P0733
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
AT-132
P0734
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
AT-138
P0740
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-148
P0744
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
AT-153
P0745
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
AT-162
P0325*2
P0600*2
EC-12
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
GI
Reference page
P0750
SFT SOL A/CIRC*3
AT-168
P0755
SFT SOL B/CIRC*3
AT-172
P1110
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
EC-448
P1111
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
EC-453
P1130
SWIRL CONT SOL/V
EC-460
P1135
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
EC-448
P1136
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2
EC-453
P1140
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B1
EC-484
P1145
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2
EC-484
P1148
CLOSED LOOP-B1
EC-493
P1165
SWL CON VC SW/CIRC
EC-495
P1168
CLOSED LOOP-B2
EC-493
P1217
ENG OVER TEMP
LC-25
P1320
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY
EC-501
P1335
CPS/CIRCUIT (REF)
EC-512
P1336
CPS/CIRC (POS) COG
EC-519
P1441
EVAP VERY SMALL LEAK
EC-528
P1444
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-543
P1446
VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-555
P1447
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
EC-563
P1448
VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-575
P1464
FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC
EC-584
P1490
VC/V BYPASS/V
EC-587
P1491
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V
EC-593
P1605
A/T DIAG COMM LINE
EC-605
P1610 - P1615*2
NATS MALFUNCTION
EL-352
P1705
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3
P1706
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
P1760
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
AT-176
EC-606
RS
AT-185
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II only.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
NOTE:
I
Regarding R50 models, “-B1” and “BK1” indicate right bank and “-B2” and “BK2” indicate left bank.
I
Bank 1 (-B1 or BK1) includes No. 1 cylinder.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-13
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
NAEC0002
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness,
warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, refer to RS section.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation tape either just
before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of Engine and A/T
NAEC0003
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
I Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause the MIL to light up.
I Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
I Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL-6, “HARNESS
CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)”.
I Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
I Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
I Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
EC-14
PRECAUTIONS
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System
NAEC0004
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF952RE
EC-15
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
Precautions
NAEC0005
I
Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the
ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if
ignition switch is turned off.
I
When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it
securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown at left.
I
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
I
Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Reference Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions
properly. Refer to EC-129.
I
After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function
Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall
Function Check” should be a good result if the repair is
completed.
SEF289H
SEF908W
SEF291H
MEF040D
SEF217U
EC-16
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
I
I
When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than the ECM
terminals, such as the ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF348N
I
I
Regarding model R50, “-B1” indicates the right bank and
“-B2” indicates the left bank as shown in the figure.
Bank 1 includes No. 1 cylinder.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF099WB
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I EL-9, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I GI-35, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
I GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
NAEC0006
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-17
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
NAEC0007
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10117100
(J36471-A)
Front heated oxygen
sensor wrench
Rear heated oxygen
sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening front and rear heated oxygen sensors with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
NT379
(J44321)
Fuel pressure adapter
and gauge kit
Checking fuel pressure with pressure gauge
SEF326Z
Commercial Service Tools
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
NAEC0008
Description
Leak detector
(J41416)
Locating the EVAP leak
NT703
EVAP service port
adapter
(J41413-OBD)
Applying positive pressure through EVAP service
port
NT704
Fuel filler cap adapter
Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
NT653
EC-18
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
GI
Description
Socket wrench
Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor
MA
EM
LC
NT705
Oxygen sensor thread
cleaner
(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before
installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with antiseize lubricant shown below.
a: J-43897-18 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5
mm, for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
b: J-43897-12 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25
mm, for Titania Oxygen Sensor
NT828
FE
CL
MT
Anti-seize lubricant (PermatexTM 133AR or
equivalent meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-907)
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
AT
TF
PD
NT779
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-19
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Engine Control Component Parts Location
NAEC0009
SEF929Y
EC-20
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF034Z
IDX
EC-21
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
SEF584Z
EC-22
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF036Z
IDX
EC-23
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
NAEC0010
MEC012D
EC-24
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Diagram
NAEC0011
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF930Y
EC-25
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Vacuum Hose Drawing
Vacuum Hose Drawing
NAEC0012
Refer to “System Diagram”, EC-25 for Vacuum Control System.
SEF037Z
EC-26
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
System Chart
System Chart
Input (Sensor)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Mass air flow sensor
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
Ignition switch
Throttle position sensor
Closed throttle position switch *3
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Air conditioner switch
Knock sensor
Intake air temperature sensor
Absolute pressure sensor
EVAP control system pressure sensor *1
Battery voltage
Power steering oil pressure switch
Vehicle speed sensor
Fuel tank temperature sensor *1
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)*2
TCM (Transmission control module)
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Electrical load
Fuel level sensor*1
NAEC0013
ECM Function
GI
Output (Actuator)
MA
Fuel injection & mixture ratio control
Injectors
Electronic ignition system
Power transistor
Idle air control system
IACV-AAC valve
Fuel pump control
Fuel pump relay
On board diagnostic system
MIL (On the instrument panel)
Swirl control valve control
Swirl control valve control solenoid
valve
Power valve control
VIAS control solenoid valve
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) control
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
(front)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) control
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(rear)
CL
EVAP canister purge flow control
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
MT
Air conditioning cut control
Air conditioner relay
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS for EVAP system
I EVAP canister vent control valve
I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
*1: These sensors are not used to control the engine system. They are used only for the on board diagnosis.
*2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*3: This switch will operate in place of the throttle position sensor to control EVAP parts if the sensor malfunctions.
EM
LC
FE
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-27
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
DESCRIPTION
Input/Output Signal Chart
NAEC0014
NAEC0014S01
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Engine speed (REF signal)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Throttle valve idle position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Vehicle speed sensor
Vehicle speed
Ignition switch
Start signal
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner operation
Knock sensor
Engine knocking condition
Battery
Battery voltage
Absolute pressure sensor
Ambient air barometric pressure
Power steering oil pressure switch
Power steering operation
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)*
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
ECM function
Actuator
Fuel injection & mixInjectors
ture ratio
control
*: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation.
Basic Multiport Fuel Injection System
NAEC0014S02
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
Various Fuel Injection Increase/Decrease Compensation
NAEC0014S03
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
I During warm-up
I When starting the engine
I During acceleration
I Hot-engine operation
I When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D”
I High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
I During deceleration
I During high engine speed operation
EC-28
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
Mixture Ratio Feedback Control (Closed loop control)
NAEC0014S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF336WA
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The warm-up three way catalyst can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
a heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about the
heated oxygen sensor 1 (front), refer to EC-194. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is located downstream of the warm-up three way catalyst. Even if the switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
Open Loop Control
FE
CL
MT
AT
NAEC0014S05
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
I Deceleration and acceleration
I High-load, high-speed operation
I Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) or its circuit
I Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) at low engine coolant temperature
I High engine coolant temperature
I During warm-up
I After shifting from “N” to “D”
I When starting the engine
Mixture Ratio Self-learning Control
NAEC0014S06
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio
as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This
is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN
compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is
rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-29
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
Fuel Injection Timing
NAEC0014S07
SEF179U
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
NAEC0014S0701
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
NAEC0014S0702
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
Fuel Shut-off
NAEC0014S08
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System
DESCRIPTION
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor
NAEC0015
NAEC0015S01
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Engine speed (REF signal)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Throttle valve idle position
Vehicle speed sensor
Vehicle speed
Ignition switch
Start signal
Knock sensor
Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Battery
Battery voltage
EC-30
ECM function
Actuator
Ignition
timing con- Power transistor
trol
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Electronic Ignition (EI) System (Cont’d)
System Description
NAEC0015S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF742M
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of
the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g.,
N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored
in the ECM.
I At starting
I During warm-up
I At idle
I At low battery voltage
I During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Sensor
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
Air Conditioning Cut Control
DESCRIPTION
Input/Output Signal Chart
FE
NAEC0016
SU
NAEC0016S01
Input Signal to ECM
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner “ON” signal
Throttle position sensor
Throttle valve opening angle
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Engine speed (REF signal)
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch
Start signal
Vehicle speed sensor
Vehicle speed
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Refrigerant pressure
Power steering oil pressure switch
Power steering operation
ECM function
Actuator
BR
ST
Air conditioner
cut control
RS
Air conditioner relay
BT
HA
SC
System Description
NAEC0016S02
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
I When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
I When cranking the engine.
I At high engine speeds.
EC-31
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Air Conditioning Cut Control (Cont’d)
I
I
I
I
When
When
When
When
the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
engine speed is excessively low.
refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
speed)
DESCRIPTION
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor
NAEC0017
NAEC0017S01
Input Signal to ECM
Vehicle speed sensor
Vehicle speed
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Neutral position
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Engine speed (REF signal)
ECM function
Fuel cut
control
Actuator
Injectors
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 1,800
rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-28.
Evaporative Emission System
DESCRIPTION
NAEC0018
SEF927U
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine
EC-32
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
GI
MA
EM
LC
INSPECTION
EVAP Canister
NAEC0019
NAEC0019S01
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Pinch the fresh air hose.
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B.
FE
CL
MT
SEF428T
Tightening Torque
AT
NAEC0019S02
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly between EVAP canister and EVAP canister vent control valve.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF231SB
Fuel Tank Vacuum Relief Valve (Built into fuel fillerNAEC0019S03
cap)
1.
2.
SEF427N
Wipe clean valve housing.
Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to
−0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF943S
EC-33
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
Vacuum Cut Valve and Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass NAEC0019S04
Valve
Refer to EC-593.
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Volume
Control Solenoid Valve
NAEC0019S05
Refer to EC-369.
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
NAEC0019S06
Refer to EC-311.
Evap Service Port
NAEC0019S07
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the
EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system
occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak.
SEF462UA
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage
SEF200U
PEF838U
NAEC0019S08
CAUTION:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure
in EVAP system.
NOTE:
I Do not start engine.
I Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP
service port may cause a leak.
With CONSULT-II
NAEC0019S0801
1) Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP
service port.
2) Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service
port adapter.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
5) Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
6) Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure
indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
7) Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
8) Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
PEF917U
EC-34
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
1)
2)
3)
4)
SEF462UA
5)
6)
Without CONSULT-II
NAEC0019S0802
Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP
service port.
Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the
EVAP service port adapter.
Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of both EVAP
canister vent control valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve
to make a closed EVAP system.
To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014
to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF598U
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-35
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
NAEC0020
SEF932Y
EC-36
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF870T
IDX
EC-37
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Positive Crankcase Ventilation
Positive Crankcase Ventilation
DESCRIPTION
SEF372Q
NAEC0021
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold
sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any
blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the
crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover.
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to
draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the
hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all
conditions.
SEF559A
INSPECTION
PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve
NAEC0022
NAEC0022S01
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve ventilation hose
from PCV valve; if the valve is working properly, a hissing noise will
be heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be
felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
SEC137A
PCV Valve Ventilation Hose
1.
2.
NAEC0022S02
Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any
hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
ET277
EC-38
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Release
Fuel Pressure Release
NAEC0023
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel
line to eliminate danger.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
SEF941Y
5.
GI
MA
NAEC0023S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF214Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AT
NAEC0023S02
Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF933Y
Fuel Pressure Check
I
I
I
I
I
SEF327Z
1.
2.
NAEC0024
When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent
parts.
Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.
Release fuel pressure to zero.
Disconnect fuel tube joint between fuel damper and injector
tube and set fuel pressure check adapter (J44321).
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-39
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Check (Cont’d)
3.
SEF328Z
Install pressure gauge to the fuel pressure check adapter as
shown in the figure.
4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
At idling:
With vacuum hose connected
Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
With vacuum hose disconnected
Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
If results are unsatisfactory, perform Fuel Pressure Regulator
Check.
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check
1.
2.
3.
NAEC0025
Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum
hose from vacuum gallery.
Plug vacuum gallery with a blind cap.
Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator.
SEF329Z
4.
Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as
vacuum is changed.
Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results
are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator.
SEF718BA
EC-40
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Injector
Injector
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
SEF937Y
4.
5.
I
I
6.
I
I
I
7.
I
GI
NAEC0026
Release fuel pressure to zero.
Remove intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-20, “TIMING
CHAIN”.
Remove fuel tube assemblies in numerical sequence as
shown in the figure at left.
Expand and remove clips securing fuel injectors.
Extract fuel injectors straight from fuel tubes.
Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal.
Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
Carefully install O-rings, including the one used with the pressure regulator.
Lubricate O-rings with a smear of engine oil.
Be careful not to damage O-rings with service tools, finger nails or clips. Do not expand or twist O-rings.
Discard old clips; replace with new ones.
Position clips in grooves on fuel injectors.
Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned
with cutouts of clips after installation.
SEF703X
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF938Y
SC
8.
9.
Align protrusions of fuel tubes with those of fuel injectors.
Insert fuel injectors straight into fuel tubes.
After properly inserting fuel injectors, check to make sure that
fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors,
and that flanges of fuel tubes are engaged with clips.
EC-41
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Injector (Cont’d)
SEF939Y
10. Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting nuts in numerical
sequence (indicated in the figure at left) and in two stages.
: Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1st stage:
9.3 - 10.8 (1.0 - 1.1, 6.9 - 7.9)
2nd stage:
20.6 - 26.5 (2.1 - 2.7, 16 - 19)
11. Install all parts removed in reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and
fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage.
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
NAEC0607
IDLE SPEED
NAEC0607S01
I Using CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
I Method A
a) Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
b) Check ignition timing.
SEF940Y
I
a)
Method B
Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
SEF942Y
EC-42
NAEC0607S02
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing (Cont’d)
b)
c)
Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to
this wire.
Check ignition timing.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF943Y
FE
CL
MT
SEF572X
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF311Q
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment
HA
NAEC0028
PREPARATION
1)
I
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0028S01
Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
Battery
Ignition system
Engine oil and coolant levels
Fuses
ECM harness connector
Vacuum hoses
EC-43
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
I
I
I
I
I
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Air intake system
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
Fuel pressure
Engine compression
Throttle valve
Evaporative emission system
On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is “OFF”.
On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio,
checks should be carried out while shift lever is in “N” position.
When measuring “CO” percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear defogger.
Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
Make the check after the cooling fan has stopped.
EC-44
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
Overall Inspection Sequence
NAEC0028S0101
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEC141C
EC-45
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1
=NAEC0028S02
INSPECTION START
1. Visually check the following:
I Air cleaner clogging
I Hoses and ducts for leaks
I Electrical connectors
I Gasket
I Throttle valve and throttle position sensor operation
2. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
3. Open engine hood and run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
SEF977U
4. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.
©
GO TO 3.
EC-46
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
4
LC
FE
PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
MT
CMPLT or INCMP
AT
TF
CMPLT
©
GO TO 5.
INCMP
©
1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Leaning”.
2. GO TO 4.
PD
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
GO TO 6.
6
EM
CL
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-58.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
5
MA
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE
HA
Replace IACV-AAC valve.
©
AX
GO TO 7.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-47
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
7
PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-58.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT
©
GO TO 8.
INCMP
©
1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4.
8
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
GO TO 9.
9
CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely
the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-75.
©
10
GO TO 4.
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.
SEF572X
M/T: 15°±5° BTDC
A/T: 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
GO TO 11.
EC-48
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
11
GI
CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-29, “Installation”.
MA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
12
EM
LC
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.
FE
CL
MT
SEF572X
M/T: 15°±5° BTDC
A/T: 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
13
AT
TF
PD
AX
PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-58.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
SU
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT
©
GO TO 14.
INCMP
©
1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 13.
BR
ST
14
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
RS
BT
HA
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
GO TO 15.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-49
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
15
CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-75.
©
16
GO TO 13.
CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
Check ignition timing again. Refer to Test No. 12.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
GO TO 17.
17
CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-29, “Installation”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 15.
NG
©
1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 13.
18
ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC No. might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-73 and AT-35, “HOW TO ERASE
DTC”.
With CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 19.
Without CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 20.
EC-50
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
19
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 2) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF945Y
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 23.
NG (Monitor does not
fluctuate.)
©
GO TO 28.
NG (Monitor fluctuates
less than 5 times.)
©
GO TO 21.
MT
AT
TF
20
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 2) SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 62 and ground.
3. Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
PD
AX
SU
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 23.
NG (Voltage does not
fluctuate.)
©
GO TO 28.
NG (Voltage fluctuates
less than 5 times.)
©
GO TO 21.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-51
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
21
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 2) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Stop engine.
Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 2).
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
See “HO2S1 MNTR (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
Without CONSULT-II
Stop engine.
Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 2).
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 62 and ground.
Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 23.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 24.
NG
©
GO TO 22.
22
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
1. Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-40.
2. Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-152.
3. Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-619.
Clean or replace if necessary.
4. Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-189.
5. Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
©
GO TO 3.
EC-52
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
23
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
2. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF945Y
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG (Monitor does not
fluctuate.)
©
GO TO 27.
NG (Monitor fluctuates
less than 5 times.)
©
GO TO 25.
24
CL
MT
AT
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1) SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 63 and ground.
2. Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
TF
PD
AX
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG (Voltage does not
fluctuate.)
©
GO TO 27.
NG (Voltage fluctuates
less than 5 times.)
©
GO TO 25.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-53
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
25
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Stop engine.
Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 1).
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
Without CONSULT-II
Stop engine.
Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 1).
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 63 and ground.
Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
GO TO 26.
26
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-40.
I Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-152.
I Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-619.
Clean or replace if necessary.
I Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-189.
I Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
©
27
1.
2.
3.
4.
GO TO 3.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1) HARNESS
Turn off engine and disconnect battery ground cable.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 1) harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 1) harness connector
terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-198.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 30.
NG
©
GO TO 29.
EC-54
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
28
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 2) HARNESS
Turn off engine and disconnect battery ground cable.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 2) harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and front heated oxygen sensor LH harness connector terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-199.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 30.
NG
©
GO TO 29.
29
MA
EM
LC
REPAIR OR REPLACE
FE
Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
©
GO TO 3.
CL
30
1.
2.
3.
4.
PREPARATION FOR “CO” % CHECK
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DOWN” and “Qd”.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF172Y
SU
BR
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF982UA
©
SC
GO TO 31.
EL
IDX
EC-55
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
31
CHECK “CO” %
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
SEF976U
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed.
SEF978U
3. Check “CO” %.
Idle CO: 1.0 - 9.5%
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
SEF976U
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed.
SEF978U
3.
4.
a.
b.
Check “CO” %.
After checking CO%,
Disconnect the resistor from terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor.
Connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 32.
NG
©
GO TO 33.
EC-56
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
32
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Stop engine.
Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 1)/(bank 2).
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
Without CONSULT-II
Stop engine.
Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 1)/(bank 2).
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 63 or 62 and ground.
Make sure that voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000 rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 33.
33
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
TF
Check the following.
I Connect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connectors to heated oxygen sensors 1 (front).
I Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-40.
I Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-152.
I Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-619.
Clean or replace if necessary.
I Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-189.
I Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
©
GI
PD
AX
SU
GO TO 3.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-57
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Air Volume Learning
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
NAEC0642
NAEC0642S01
“Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be
performed under any of the following conditions:
I Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced.
I Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PRE-CONDITIONING
SEF452Y
SEF454Y
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
SEF455Y
NAEC0642S02
Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of
the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are
missed for even a moment.
I Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
I Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99°C (158 - 210°F)
I PNP switch: ON
I Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime running light systems, if
the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the
headlamp will not illuminate.
I Cooling fan motor: Not operating
I Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
I Vehicle speed: Stopped
I Transmission: Warmed-up
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive
vehicle for 10 minutes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
NAEC0642S03
NAEC0642S0301
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITIONING” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
7. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
8. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
9. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
If “INCMP” is displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the
problem by referring to the NOTE below.
10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within specifications.
ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Idle speed
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing
M/T: 15°±5° BTDC
A/T: 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
EC-58
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Air Volume Learning (Cont’d)
Without CONSULT-II
NAEC0642S0302
1.
2.
3.
4.
SEF944Y
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITIONING” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown),
then reconnect it within 5 seconds.
8. Wait 20 seconds.
9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the
result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the
problem by referring to the NOTE below.
10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within specifications.
ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Idle speed
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing
M/T: 15°±5° BTDC
A/T: 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
NOTE:
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully,
proceed as follows:
1) Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2) Check PCV valve operation.
3) Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air
leakage.
4) Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory.
(Refer to Basic Inspection, EC-102.)
5) When the above four items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem.
It is useful to perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE”, EC-138.
6) If any of the following conditions occur after the engine
has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and perform “Idle air volume learning” all over again:
I Engine stalls.
I Erroneous idle.
I Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-59
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Introduction
Introduction
NAEC0029
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information
SAE Mode
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Mode 3 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data
Mode 2 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code
Mode 1 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
Mode 7 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits
Mode 6 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC
1st trip DTC
Freeze Frame
data
1st trip Freeze
Frame data
SRT code
Test value
CONSULT-II
X
X
X
X
X
—
GST
X
X*1
X
—
X
X
*1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-119.)
Two Trip Detection Logic
NAEC0030
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored
in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
X: Applicable
MIL
DTC
1st trip
Items
—: Not Exit
1st trip DTC
2nd trip
1st trip
2nd trip
1st trip
2nd trip
displaying displaying displaying displaying
Blinking
Lighting
up
Blinking
Lighting
up
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0306 (0701, 0605 — 0608) is
being detected
X
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0306 (0701, 0605 — 0608) is
being detected
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
Closed loop control
— DTC: P1148 (0307), P1168
(0308)
—
X
—
—
X
—
X
—
Fail-safe items (Refer to EC-119.)
—
X
—
—
X*1
—
X*1
—
Except above
—
—
—
X
—
X
X
—
*1: Except “ECM”
EC-60
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
NAEC0031
GI
NAEC0031S01
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and
2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-73.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-70. These items are required by legal
regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously
are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a problem. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to EC-100. Then perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item
requires repair.
MA
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
TF
NAEC0031S0101
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1320, P0705, P0750, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
I 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
I Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST does not indicate whether the malfunction
is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify
malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF992X
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
NAEC0031S02
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant
temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed and absolute pressure at
the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
EC-61
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-86.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
Priority
1
2
3
Items
Freeze frame data
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or
1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and
freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged
in the ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-73.
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
NAEC0031S03
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”,
use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer’s
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM
memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is “ON” during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
EC-62
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
SRT Item
=NAEC0031S0310
GI
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item
(CONSULT-II indication)
Performance Priority*
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
Corresponding
DTC No.
CATALYST
3
Three way catalyst function
P0420, P0430
EVAP SYSTEM
2
EVAP control system (small leak) (negative pressure)
P0440
3
EVAP control system (very small leak) (negative pressure)/
(positive pressure)
P1441
3
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
P1447
3
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (circuit)
P0130, P0150
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (lean shift monitoring)
P0131, P0151
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (rich shift monitoring)
P0132, P0152
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (response monitoring)
P0133, P0153
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (high voltage)
P0134, P0154
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (min. voltage monitoring)
P0137, P0157
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (max. voltage monitoring)
P0138, P0158
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (response monitoring)
P0139, P0159
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (high voltage)
P0140, P0160
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
P0135, P0155
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
P0141, P0161
O2 SENSOR
O2 SEN HEATER
3
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority
for models with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-63
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
SRT Set Timing
=NAEC0031S0311
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done
regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is
shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result
Diagnosis
All OK
Case 1
Case 2
NG exists
Case 3
+ ON ,
OFF
Ignition cycle
+ ON , OFF + ON ,
OFF
+ ON ,
P0400
OK (1)
— (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
P0402
OK (1)
— (1)
— (1)
OK (2)
P1402
OK (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
— (2)
SRT of EGR
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
P0400
OK (1)
— (1)
— (1)
— (1)
P0402
— (0)
— (0)
OK (1)
— (1)
P1402
OK (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
— (2)
SRT of EGR
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
P0400
OK
OK
—
—
P0402
—
—
—
—
P1402
NG
—
NG
NG
(Consecutive NG)
(1st trip)
DTC
1st trip DTC
—
1st trip DTC
DTC
(= MIL “ON”)
SRT of EGR
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT
will indicate “CMPLT”. , Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. , Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. , Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary of each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
I The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
I The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
I When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
I If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior
to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
NAEC0031S0312
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
EC-64
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF170Z
*1
EC-61
*2
EC-65
*3
How to Display SRT Code
EC-66
BT
NAEC0031S0301
With CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT
codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
With GST
Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown below.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is
complete and SRT is set.
EC-65
RS
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
SEF949Z
How to Set SRT Code
NAEC0031S0302
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
With CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on “Performance Priority” in the table
on EC-63.
Without CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
EC-66
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
Driving Pattern
NAEC0031S0303
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF947Y
EC-67
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
I
The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time required, for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
− Sea level
− Flat road
− Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
− Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
I The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 70 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
I The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 70 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
I The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 92 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
I When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
I The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times.
Pattern 4:
I Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes.
I The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving.
I If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern.
1) Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle.
2) Repeat driving pattern shown below at least 10 times.
I During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
SEF414S
*3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models
Set the selector lever in the “D” position with the overdrive switch turned ON.
Suggested upshift speeds for M/T models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
and individual driving habits.
EC-68
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
For quick acceleration in low altitude
areas and high altitude areas
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
ACCEL shift point
km/h (MPH)
CRUISE shift point
km/h (MPH)
km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd
21 (13)
21 (13)
24 (15)
2nd to 3rd
37 (23)
26 (16)
40 (25)
3rd to 4th
53 (33)
44 (27)
64 (40)
4th to 5th
63 (39)
58 (36)
72 (45)
Gear change
km/h (MPH)
1st
50 (30)
2nd
89 (55)
3rd
128 (80)
4th
—
5th
—
MA
EM
LC
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the
highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road
conditions to ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
Gear
GI
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
NAEC0031S04
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (30 test
items).
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen.
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
PD
AX
SU
BR
Test value (GST display)
SRT item
Self-diagnostic test item
Test limit
Application
01H
Max.
X
02H
Max.
X
TID
CID
Three way catalyst function
(Right bank)
01H
Three way catalyst function
(Left bank)
03H
EVAP control system
(Small leak)
05H
03H
Max.
X
EVAP control system purge flow
monitoring
06H
83H
Min.
X
CATALYST
ST
RS
BT
EVAP SYSTEM
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-69
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
Test value (GST display)
SRT item
Self-diagnostic test item
Test limit
Application
04H
Max.
X
0AH
84H
Min.
X
0BH
04H
Max.
X
0CH
04H
Max.
X
0DH
04H
Max.
X
11H
05H
Max.
X
12H
85H
Min.
X
13H
05H
Max.
X
14H
05H
Max.
X
15H
05H
Max.
X
19H
86H
Min.
X
1AH
86H
Min.
X
1BH
06H
Max.
X
1CH
06H
Max.
X
21H
87H
Min.
X
22H
87H
Min.
X
23H
07H
Max.
X
24H
07H
Max.
X
29H
08H
Max.
X
2AH
88H
Min.
X
2BH
09H
Max.
X
2CH
89H
Min.
X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) heater
(bank 1)
2DH
0AH
Max.
X
2EH
8AH
Min.
X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) heater
(bank 2)
2FH
0BH
Max.
X
30H
8BH
Min.
X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
(bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
(bank 2)
TID
CID
09H
O2 SENSOR
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
(bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
(bank 2)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) heater
(bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) heater
(bank 2)
O2 SENSOR HEATER
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
NAEC0031S05
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC*1
SRT code
Test value/ Test
limit
(GST only)
1st trip DTC*1
Reference page
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000
—
—
—
—
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0100
—
—
X
EC-152
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC
P0105
—
—
X
EC-160
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0110
—
—
X
EC-166
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC
P0115
—
—
X
EC-171
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
EC-70
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
GI
DTC*1
SRT code
Test value/ Test
limit
(GST only)
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC
P0120
—
—
X
EC-176
*COOLAN T SEN/CIRC
P0125
—
—
X
EC-189
HO2S1 (B1)
P0130
X
X
X*2
EC-194
HO2S1 (B1)
P0131
X
X
X*2
EC-204
HO2S1 (B1)
P0132
X
X
X*2
EC-212
HO2S1 (B1)
P0133
X
X
X*2
EC-220
HO2S1 (B1)
P0134
X
X
X*2
EC-233
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
P0135
X
X
X*2
EC-242
HO2S2 (B1)
P0137
X
X
X*2
EC-249
HO2S2 (B1)
P0138
X
X
X*2
EC-259
HO2S2 (B1)
P0139
X
X
X*2
EC-269
HO2S2 (B1)
P0140
X
X
X*2
EC-279
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0141
X
X
X*2
EC-288
HO2S1 (B2)
P0150
X
X
X*2
EC-194
HO2S1 (B2)
P0151
X
X
X*2
EC-204
HO2S1 (B2)
P0152
X
X
X*2
EC-212
HO2S1 (B2)
P0153
X
X
X*2
EC-220
HO2S1 (B2)
P0154
X
X
X*2
EC-233
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
P0155
X
X
X*2
EC-242
HO2S2 (B2)
P0157
X
X
X*2
EC-249
HO2S2 (B2)
P0158
X
X
X*2
EC-259
HO2S2 (B2)
P0159
X
X
X*2
EC-269
HO2S2 (B2)
P0160
X
X
X*2
EC-279
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0161
X
X
X*2
EC-288
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1
P0171
—
—
X
EC-296
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1
P0172
—
—
X
EC-304
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK2
P0174
—
—
X
EC-296
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK2
P0175
—
—
X
EC-304
FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0180
—
—
X
EC-311
ENG OVER TEMP
P0217
—
—
X
EC-316
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
P0300
—
—
X
EC-322
CYL 1 MISFIRE
P0301
—
—
X
EC-322
CYL 2 MISFIRE
P0302
—
—
X
EC-322
CYL 3 MISFIRE
P0303
—
—
X
EC-322
CYL 4 MISFIRE
P0304
—
—
X
EC-322
CYL 5 MISFIRE
P0305
—
—
X
EC-322
CYL 6 MISFIRE
P0306
—
—
X
EC-322
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
EC-71
1st trip DTC*1
Reference page
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
DTC*1
SRT code
Test value/ Test
limit
(GST only)
1st trip DTC*1
Reference page
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0325
—
—
—
EC-330
CPS/CIRCUIT (POS)
P0335
—
—
X
EC-336
CAM PS/CIRC (PHS)
P0340
—
—
X
EC-344
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
P0420
X
X
X*2
EC-349
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
P0430
X
X
X*2
EC-349
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P0440
X
X
X*2
EC-354
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0443
—
—
X
EC-369
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P0446
—
—
X
EC-376
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0450
—
—
X
EC-383
EVAP GROSS LEAK
P0455
X
X
X*2
EC-396
FUEL LV SE (SLOSH)
P0460
—
—
X
EC-409
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
P0461
—
—
X
EC-413
FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC
P0464
—
—
X
EC-415
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC
P0500
—
—
X
EC-419
IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC
P0505
—
—
X
EC-424
CLOSED TP SW/CIRC
P0510
—
—
X
EC-433
A/T COMM LINE
P0600
—
—
—
EC-442
ECM
P0605
—
—
X
EC-446
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
—
—
X
AT-99
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
—
—
X
AT-105
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT
P0720
—
—
X
AT-111
ENGINE SPEED SIG
P0725
—
—
X
AT-116
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
—
—
X
AT-120
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
P0732
—
—
X
AT-126
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
—
—
X
AT-132
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
—
—
X
AT-138
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
P0740
—
—
X
AT-148
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
—
—
X
AT-153
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0745
—
—
X
AT-162
SFT SOL A/CIRC
P0750
—
—
X
AT-168
SFT SOL B/CIRC
P0755
—
—
X
AT-172
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
P1110
—
—
X
EC-448
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
P1111
—
—
X
EC-453
SWIRL CONT SOL/V
P1130
—
—
X
EC-460
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
P1135
—
—
X
EC-448
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2
P1136
—
—
X
EC-453
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B1
P1140
—
—
X
EC-484
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
EC-72
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
GI
DTC*1
SRT code
Test value/ Test
limit
(GST only)
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2
P1145
—
—
X
EC-484
CLOSED LOOP-B1
P1148
—
—
X
EC-493
SWL CON VC SW/CIRC
P1165
—
—
X
EC-495
CLOSED LOOP-B2
P1168
—
—
X
EC-493
ENG OVER TEMP
P1217
—
—
X
LC-25
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY
P1320
—
—
X
EC-501
CPS/CIRCUIT (REF)
P1335
—
—
X
EC-512
CPS/CIRC (POS) COG
P1336
—
—
X
EC-519
EVAP VERY SMALL LEAK
P1441
X
X
X*2
EC-528
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P1444
—
—
X
EC-543
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1446
—
—
X
EC-555
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
P1447
X
X
X*2
EC-563
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1448
—
—
X
EC-575
FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC
P1464
—
—
X
EC-584
VC/V BYPASS/V
P1490
—
—
X
EC-587
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V
P1491
—
—
X
EC-593
A/T DIAG COMM LINE
P1605
—
—
X
EC-605
TP SEN/CIRC A/T
P1705
—
—
X
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
P1706
—
—
X
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
P1760
—
—
X
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
1st trip DTC*1
Reference page
AT-176
EC-606
AT-185
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: These are not displayed with GST.
NOTE:
Regarding R50 models, “-B1” and “BK1” indicate right bank and “-B2” and “BK2” indicate left bank.
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC (
With CONSULT-II)
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
NAEC0031S06
NAEC0031S0601
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
I If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased
individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-73
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
SEF823YA
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
How to Erase DTC (
With GST)
NAEC0031S0602
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)” in AT section titled “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS”, “Self-diagnosis”. (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis
only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST.
I If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost after approx.
24 hours.
I The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1) Diagnostic trouble codes
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3) Freeze frame data
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
5) System readiness test (SRT) codes
6) Test values
7) Others
EC-74
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
NAEC0031S08
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF515Y
I
I
I
If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with
CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to “NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System —
NATS)” in EL section.
Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS)
initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual,
IVIS/NVIS.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
DESCRIPTION
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
NAEC0032
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF217U
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
I If the MIL does not light up, refer to EL-134, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-653.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
RS
BT
HA
On Board Diagnostic System Function
NAEC0032S01
The on board diagnostic system has the following two functions.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-75
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
Diagnostic Test
Mode
KEY and ENG.
Status
Function
Explanation of Function
Mode I
Ignition switch in
“ON” position
BULB CHECK
This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
MALFUNCTION
WARNING
This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is
detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
I Coolant overtemperature enrichment protection
I “Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)”
I “Closed loop control”
I Fail-safe mode
Engine stopped
Engine running
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check
NAEC0032S03
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to
EL-134, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-653.
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Malfunction Warning
MIL
NAEC0032S04
Condition
ON
When the malfunction is detected or the ECM’s CPU is malfunctioning.
OFF
No malfunction.
OBD System Operation Chart
NAEC0033
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0033S01
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to “Two Trip Detection Logic” on
EC-60.
The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel
Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS”
mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in “OK” for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items
MIL (goes off)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear)
NAEC0033S02
Fuel Injection System
Misfire
Other
3 (pattern B)
3 (pattern B)
3 (pattern B)
80 (pattern C)
80 (pattern C)
40 (pattern A)
1 (pattern C), *1
1 (pattern C), *1
1 (pattern B)
EC-76
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
Items
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
(clear)
Fuel Injection System
Misfire
Other
*1, *2
*1, *2
1 (pattern B)
For details about patterns “B” and “C” under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-79.
For details about patterns “A” and “B” under “Other”, see EC-81.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-77
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
=NAEC0033S03
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is
driven 3 times (pattern B) without
any malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
the DTC and the freeze frame
data will be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame
data will not be displayed any
longer after vehicle is driven 80
times (pattern C) without the same
malfunction. (The DTC and the
freeze frame data still remain in
ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected
for the first time, the 1st trip DTC
and the 1st trip freeze frame data
will be stored in ECM.
*6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
EC-78
freeze frame data will be cleared
at the moment OK is detected.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
trip freeze frame data will be
cleared.
*8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern B>
GI
NAEC0033S04
NAEC0033S0401
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
I The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C>
MA
EM
LC
NAEC0033S0402
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
1) The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
I When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
I When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
I The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1).
I The C counter will be counted up when (1) is satisfied without the same malfunction.
I The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
I The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-79
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT
FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”NAEC0033S05
SEF393S
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is
driven 3 times (pattern B) without
any malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
the DTC and the freeze frame
data will be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame
data will not be displayed any
longer after vehicle is driven 40
times (pattern A) without the same
malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame
data still remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected
for the first time, the 1st trip DTC
EC-80
and the 1st trip freeze frame data
will be stored in ECM.
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
without the same malfunction.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
trip freeze frame data will be
cleared.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
GI
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
NAEC0033S06
<Driving Pattern A>
NAEC0033S0601
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AEC574
I
I
I
The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
AT
TF
NAEC0033S0602
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
I The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”).
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-81
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
=NAEC0034
NAEC0034S01
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector, which is located
under LH dash panel near the fuse box cover.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START”.
5.
Touch “ENGINE”.
SEF941Y
PBR455D
SEF948Y
6.
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual.
SEF949Y
EC-82
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL
GI
SYSTEMS APPLICATION
NAEC0034S02
MA
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
INPUT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Item
WORK
SUPPORT
DTC*1
FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)
X
X
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
DATA
MONITOR
DATA
MONITOR
(SPEC)
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
ACTIVE
TEST
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUPPORT
X
X
X
X
X
Mass air flow sensor
X
X
X
Engine coolant temperature sensor
X
X
X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
X
X
X
X
X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
X
X
X
X
X
Vehicle speed sensor
X
X
X
Throttle position sensor
X
X
X
Fuel tank temperature sensor
X
X
X
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
X
X
X
Absolute pressure sensor
X
X
X
Intake air temperature sensor
X
X
X
Knock sensor
X
X
X
EM
LC
FE
X
CL
MT
AT
X
TF
PD
AX
Ignition switch (start signal)
X
X
X
X
Closed throttle position switch
(throttle position sensor signal)
X
X
Air conditioner switch
X
X
X
X
ST
Power steering oil pressure
switch
X
X
RS
Battery voltage
X
X
Ambient air temperature switch
X
X
Load signal
X
X
Closed throttle position switch
Park/neutral position (PNP)
switch
X
X
SU
BR
BT
HA
Swirl control valve control
vacuum check switch
X
X
X
Fuel level sensor
X
X
X
Intake valve timing control position sensor
X
X
X
SC
EL
IDX
EC-83
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
DATA
MONITOR
ACTIVE
TEST
X
X
X
X
(Ignition
signal)
X
X
X
IACV-AAC valve
X
X
X
X
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Item
WORK
SUPPORT
DTC*1
FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
Injectors
Power transistor (Ignition timing)
Air conditioner relay
Fuel pump relay
OUTPUT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
DATA
MONITOR
(SPEC)
X
SRT
STATUS
X
X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
heater
X
X
X
X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
heater
X
X
X
X
EVAP canister vent control valve
X
X
X
X
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
X
X
X
X
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
VIAS control solenoid valve
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
Calculated load value
X
X
DTC
WORK
SUPPORT
X
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-61.
EC-84
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode
=NAEC0034S03
GI
Function
Work support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame
data can be read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor
Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Data monitor (SPEC)
Input/Output specification of the basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
other data monitor items can be read.
Active test
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
DTC confirmation
The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM part number
ECM part number can be read.
*1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1) Diagnostic trouble codes
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3) Freeze frame data
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
5) System readiness test (SRT) codes
6) Test values
7) Others
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-85
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
WORK SUPPORT MODE
WORK ITEM
CONDITION
=NAEC0034S04
USAGE
TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ
I FOLLOW THE BASIC INSPECTION INSTRUCTION IN When adjusting the idle throttle
THE SERVICE MANUAL.
position
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
I FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START”
DURING IDLING.
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
When releasing fuel pressure
from fuel line
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN
I THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
When learning the idle air volume
SELF-LEARNING CONT
I THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL
COEFFICIENT.
When clean the coefficient of selflearning control valve
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE
OPEN THE VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE AND
CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
I IGN SW “ON”
I ENGINE NOT RUNNING
I AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
I NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP
SYSTEM
I TANK FUEL TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
I WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
I WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM
CLOSE” UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE,
CONSULT-II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY
APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE
BATTERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
When detecting EVAP vapor leak
point of EVAP system
TARGET IGNITION TIMING ADJ*
I IDLE CONDITION
I When adjusting target ignition
timing
After adjustment, confirm target
ignition timing with a timing
light.
I If once the “TARGET IDLE
RPM ADJ” has been done, the
Idle Air Volume Learning procedure will not be completed.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ*
I IDLE CONDITION
When setting target idle speed
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
DTC and 1st Trip DTC
NAEC0034S05
NAEC0034S0501
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS — INDEX” (See EC-8.)
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
NAEC0034S0502
Freeze frame data
item*1
DIAG TROUBLE
CODE
[PXXXX]
Description
I The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”.
(Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-8.)
EC-86
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
GI
Freeze frame data
item*1
FUEL SYS-B1*2
FUEL SYS-B2*2
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
Description
I “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I One mode in the following is displayed.
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
“MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
“MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
MA
I The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
LC
EM
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
I The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
I “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
FE
L-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%]
I “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
CL
ENGINE SPEED
[rpm]
I The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VHCL SPEED [km/h]
or [mph]
I The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
ABSOL TH·P/S [% or
degree]
I The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
I The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
or [°F]
I The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%]
S-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%]
L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%]
MT
AT
TF
*1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
*2: Regarding R50 model, “-B1” indicates right bank and “-B2” indicates left bank.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-87
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored item [Unit]
ENG SPEED [rpm]
ECM
input
signals
Main
signals
Description
q
q
I Indicates the engine speed computed
from the REF signal (120° signal) of the
crankshaft position sensor (REF).
CKPS·RPM (POS)
[rpm]
q
I Indicates the engine speed computed
from the POS signal (1° signal) of the
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
POS COUNT
q
I Indicates the number of signal plate
(Flywheel/Drive Plate) cogs (tooth) during one revolution of the engine.
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]
q
I When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
I The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the
engine coolant temperature sensor) is
displayed.
I When the engine coolant temperature
sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the
ECM is displayed.
q
HO2S1 (B1) [V]
q
q
HO2S1 (B2) [V]
q
q
HO2S2 (B1) [V]
q
q
HO2S2 (B2) [V]
q
q
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
[RICH/LEAN]
q
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN]
q
I The signal voltage of the front heated
oxygen sensor is displayed.
I The signal voltage of the rear heated
oxygen sensor is displayed.
I Display of front heated oxygen sensor
signal during air-fuel ratio feedback
control:
RICH ... means the mixture became
“rich”, and control is being affected
toward a leaner mixture.
LEAN ... means the mixture became
“lean”, and control is being affected
toward a rich mixture.
I After turning ON the ignition switch,
“RICH” is displayed until air-fuel mixture
ratio feedback control begins.
I When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
clamped, the value just before the
clamping is displayed continuously.
I Display of rear heated oxygen sensor
signal:
RICH ... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively
small.
LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively
large.
I When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
[RICH/LEAN]
q
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph]
q
q
I The vehicle speed computed from the
vehicle speed sensor signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT [V]
q
q
I The power supply voltage of ECM is
displayed.
THRTL POS SEN [V]
q
q
I The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed.
FUEL T/TMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
I Accuracy becomes poor if engine
speed drops below the idle rpm.
I If the signal is interrupted while the
engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
I The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor is displayed.
q
q
Remarks
q
COOLAN TEMP/S
[°C] or [°F]
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN]
=NAEC0034S06
I The fuel temperature judged from the
tank fuel temperature sensor signal
voltage is displayed.
EC-88
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
input
signals
GI
Main
signals
Description
q
EVAP SYS PRES [V]
q
I The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed.
ABSOL PRES/SE [V]
q
I The signal voltage of the absolute pressure sensor is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL SE [V]
q
I The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed.
START SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
q
q
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
starter signal.
CLSD THL POS
[ON/OFF]
q
q
I Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM according to the throttle
position sensor signal.
CLSD THL/P SW
[ON/OFF]
q
AIR COND SIG
[ON/OFF]
q
P/N POSI SW
[ON/OFF]
PW/ST SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
q
q
I After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal.
FE
CL
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
conditioner switch as determined by the
air conditioner signal.
AT
q
q
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
q
I [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering oil pressure switch determined by
the power steering oil pressure signal is
indicated.
q
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
electrical load signal and/or lighting
switch.
ON ... rear defogger is operating and/or
lighting switch is on.
OFF ... rear defogger is not operating
and lighting switch is not on.
IGNITION SW
[ON/OFF]
q
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch.
q
I The control condition of the swirl control valve control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input
signals) is indicated.
I ON ... Swirl control valve is closed.
OFF ... Swirl control valve is opened.
q
INJ PULSE-B2
[msec]
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
LC
MT
q
INJ PULSE-B1
[msec]
EM
I Indicates mechanical contact [ON/OFF]
condition of the closed throttle position
switch.
LOAD SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
SWRL CONT S/V
[ON/OFF]
MA
I The intake air temperature determined
by the signal voltage of the intake air
temperature sensor is indicated.
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
q
Remarks
q
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
I Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
width compensated by ECM according
to the input signals.
I “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board
correction.
EC-89
I When the engine is stopped, a certain
computed value is indicated.
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
ECM
input
signals
Main
signals
Description
IGN TIMING [BTDC]
q
I Indicates the ignition timing computed
by ECM according to the input signals.
IACV-AAC/V [step]
q
I Indicates the IACV-AAC valve control
value computed by ECM according to
the input signals.
Monitored item [Unit]
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
q
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]
q
AIR COND RLY
[ON/OFF]
q
I The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by ECM according to
the input signal) is indicated.
FUEL PUMP RLY
[ON/OFF]
q
I Indicates the fuel pump relay control
condition determined by ECM according to the input signals.
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
[ON/OFF]
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
[ON/OFF]
I When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
I Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve control
value computed by the ECM according
to the input signals.
I The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
PURG VOL C/V [%]
VENT CONT/V
[ON/OFF]
Remarks
I The mean value of the air-fuel ratio
feedback correction factor per cycle is
indicated.
I The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated.
I ON ... Closed
OFF ... Open
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front
heated oxygen sensor heater determined by ECM according to the input
signals.
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear
heated oxygen sensor heater determined by ECM according to the input
signals.
VC/V BYPASS/V
[ON/OFF]
I The control condition of the vacuum cut
valve bypass valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated.
I ON ... Open
OFF ... Closed
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
I “Calculated load value” indicates the
value of the current airflow divided by
peak airflow.
ABSOL TH·P/S
[% or degree]
I “Absolute throttle position sensor” indicates the throttle opening computed by
ECM according to the signal voltage of
the throttle position sensor.
MASS AIRFLOW
[g·m/s]
I Indicates the mass airflow computed by
ECM according to the signal voltage of
the mass airflow sensor.
EC-90
I When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
I This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
input
signals
GI
Main
signals
Description
Remarks
MA
INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA]
I Indicate [°CA] of intake camshaft
advanced angle.
INT/V TIM (B2) [°CA]
INT/V SOL (B2) [%]
I The control condition of the intake
valve timing control solenoid valve is
indicated.
TRVL AFTER MIL
[km] or [Mile]
I Distance traveled while MIL is activated
VIAS S/V
[ON/OFF]
I The control condition of the VIAS control solenoid valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signal) is indicated.
I OFF ... VIAS control solenoid valve is
not operating.
ON ... VIAS control solenoid valve is
operating.
INT/V SOL (B1) [%]
SWL CON VC SW
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
swirl control valve control vacuum
check switch.
ON ... Swirl control valve is not operational.
OFF ... Swirl control valve is operational.
IDL A/V LEAN
I Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
YET ... Idle air volume learning has not
been performed yet.
CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
INCMP ... Idle air volume learning has
not been performed successfully.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
I Voltage measured by the voltage
probe.
Voltage [V]
I Pulse width, frequency or duty cycle
measured by the pulse probe.
Frequenty
[msec] or [Hz] or [%]
I Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to
be measured.
I Figures with “#”s are temporary ones.
They are the same figures as an actual
piece of data which was just previously
measured.
NOTE:
I
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
I
Regarding R50 model, “-B1” indicates right bank and “-B2” indicates left bank.
I
Bank 1 (-B1 or BK1) includes No. 1 cylinder.
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
Monitored item [Unit]
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
ECM
input
signals
Main
signals
q
q
BR
ST
RS
BT
NAEC0034S11
HA
Description
Remarks
I The signal voltage of the mass air flow sen- I When the engine is running, specifisor specification is displayed.
cation range is indicated.
I “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injecI When the engine is running, specifition pulse width programmed into ECM,
cation range is indicated.
prior to any learned on board correction.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-91
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
input
signals
Main
signals
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
q
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]
q
Description
Remarks
I When the engine is running, specifiI Indicates the mean value of the air-fuel ratio
cation range is indicated.
feedback correction factor per cycle.
I This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
I
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
I
Regarding R50 model, “B1” indicates bank 1 and “B2” indicates bank 2.
ACTIVE TEST MODE
TEST ITEM
CONDITION
NAEC0034S07
JUDGEMENT
CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
I Engine: Return to the original
I Harness and connector
trouble condition
If trouble symptom disappears, see
FUEL INJECTION
I Fuel injectors
I Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
I Heated oxygen sensor
tion using CONSULT-II.
I Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
IGNITION TIMING I Timing light: Set
I Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
IACV-AAC/V
OPENING
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
I Change the IACV-AAC valve
opening percent using CONSULT-II.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
I Adjust initial ignition timing
CHECK ITEM.
Engine speed changes according
to the opening percent.
I Harness and connector
I IACV-AAC valve
POWER BALANCE
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
I A/C switch “OFF”
I Shift lever “N”
I Cut off each injector signal one
at a time using CONSULT-II.
Engine runs rough or dies.
I
I
I
I
I
I
ENG COOLANT
TEMP
I Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
I Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II.
I Harness and connector
If trouble symptom disappears, see I Engine coolant temperature senCHECK ITEM.
sor
I Fuel injectors
FUEL PUMP
RELAY
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
I Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.
Fuel pump relay makes the operat- I Harness and connector
ing sound.
I Fuel pump relay
VIAS SOL VALVE
I Ignition switch: ON
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with CONSULT-II and listen for operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
sound.
I Solenoid valve
SWIRL CONT
SOL VALVE
I Ignition switch: ON
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with CONSULT-II and listen for operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
sound.
I Solenoid valve
PURG VOL
CONT/V
I Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
I Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according
volume control solenoid valve
to the opening percent.
opening percent using CONSULT-II.
EC-92
Harness and connector
Compression
Injectors
Power transistor
Spark plugs
Ignition coils
I Harness and connector
I Solenoid valve
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
TEST ITEM
CONDITION
JUDGEMENT
CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
FUEL/T TEMP
SEN
I Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.
VENT
CONTROL/V
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
sound.
I Solenoid valve
VC/V BYPASS/V
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
sound.
I Solenoid valve
TARGET INT/V
TIM
I Engine: After warming up, hold
engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000
rpm.
I Change the intake valve timing
using CONSULT-II.
I Harness and connector
If trouble symptom disappears, see
I Intake valve timing control soleCHECK ITEM.
noid valve
GI
MA
EM
LC
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
NAEC0034S08
CL
MT
NAEC0034S0801
For details, refer to “SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE”,
EC-62.
SRT Work Support Mode
FE
NAEC0034S0803
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT
while monitoring the SRT status.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-93
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
DTC Work Support Mode
Test mode
Test item
Condition
NAEC0034S0802
Reference page
EVAP SML LEAK P0440
EC-354
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P1441
EC-528
EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM PURG VOL CN/V P1444
EC-543
PURGE FLOW P1447
EC-563
VC CUT/V BP/V P1491
EC-593
HO2S1 (B1) P0130
EC-194
HO2S1 (B1) P0131
EC-204
HO2S1 (B1) P0132
EC-212
HEATED OXYGEN SEN- HO2S1 (B1) P0133
SOR 1 (FRONT)
HO2S1 (B2) P0150
Refer to corresponding
trouble diagnosis for
DTC.
HO2S1 (B2) P0151
EC-220
EC-194
EC-204
HO2S1 (B2) P0152
EC-212
HO2S1 (B2) P0153
EC-220
HO2S2 (B1) P0137
EC-249
HO2S2 (B1) P0138
EC-259
HEATED OXYGEN SEN- HO2S2 (B1) P0139
SOR 2 (REAR)
HO2S2 (B2) P0157
EC-269
HO2S2 (B2) P0158
EC-259
HO2S2 (B2) P0159
EC-269
EC-249
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE
(RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
NAEC0034S10
SEF705Y
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by
touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
1) “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
I The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in
real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR”
in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ...
xx%” as shown at left, and the data after the malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%,
“REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched
on the screen during “ Recording Data ... xx%”, “REAL-TIME
DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION
MANUAL.
2) “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
I DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
SEF707X
EC-94
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
Use these triggers as follows:
1) “AUTO TRIG”
I While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure to select to “DATA
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is detected.
I While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II
should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction
is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to
GI-25, “Incident Simulation Tests”.)
2) “MANU TRIG”
I If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR”
is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting
“MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data
can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with
the value for the normal operating condition.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF714Y
SC
EL
IDX
EC-95
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Generic Scan Tool (GST)
DESCRIPTION
=NAEC0035
NAEC0035S01
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978
has 8 different functions explained on the next page.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service
manual.
SEF139P
GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
NAEC0035S02
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the fuse box cover.
SEF941Y
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF398S
5.
Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service procedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker.
SEF416S
EC-96
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (GST) (Cont’d)
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode
NAEC0035S03
GI
Function
MA
MODE 1
READINESS TESTS
This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog
inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
MODE 2
(FREEZE DATA)
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM
during the freeze frame. [For details, refer to “Freeze Frame Data” (EC-86).]
EM
MODE 3
DTCs
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were
stored by ECM.
LC
CLEAR DIAG INFO
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
I Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1)
I Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3)
I Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
I Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2)
I Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1)
I Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)
MODE 4
FE
MODE 6
(ON BOARD TESTS)
This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific
components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
CL
MODE 7
(ON BOARD TESTS)
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related
powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving
conditions.
MT
This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch “ON” position (Engine stopped).
When this mode is performed, the following parts can be opened or closed.
I EVAP canister vent control valve open
I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve closed
In the following conditions, this mode cannot function.
I Low ambient temperature
I Low battery voltage
I Engine running
I Ignition switch “OFF”
I Low fuel temperature
I Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
AT
MODE 8
MODE 9
—
(CALIBRATION ID)
This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information
such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-97
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction
Introduction
MEF036D
SEF233G
NAEC0036
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel
control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators.
It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and
stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no problems
such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other problems with
the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-100.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such problems, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and
under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example on next page should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically
controlled engine vehicle.
SEF234G
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
SEF907L
NAEC0036S01
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction
of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make
trouble-shooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a
customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
I Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
I Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
EC-98
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)
Worksheet Sample
NAEC0036S0101
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
MTBL0017
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-99
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow
Work Flow
NAEC0037
SEF510ZF
*1
*2
*3
EC-119
If time data of “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” is other than “0” or
“[1t]”, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT”, EC-142.
If the incident cannot be verified,
perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”,
EC-142.
*4
*5
If the on board diagnostic system
cannot be performed, check main
power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR POWER SUPPLY”, EC-144.
If malfunctioning part cannot be
EC-100
*6
*7
detected, perform “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
EC-67
EC-138
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow (Cont’d)
DESCRIPTION FOR WORK FLOW
STEP
NAEC0037S01
DESCRIPTION
STEP I
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using
the “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-99.
STEP II
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC
and the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-73.) The (1st trip) DTC and
the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The “Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-120.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
STEP III
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
STEP IV
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read
the (1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The
(1st trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
STEP V
STEP VI
STEP VII
GI
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-102.) If CONSULT-II is
available, perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE”, EC-138. (If malfunction is detected, proceed to “REPAIR REPLACE”.) Then
perform inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-120.)
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes.
Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-124, 129.
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to GI-27, “Circuit
Inspection”.
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”,
EC-142.
AX
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions
and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint.
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the
incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in
ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-73.)
RS
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-101
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection
Basic Inspection
NAEC0038
Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical
loads applied;
I Headlamp switch is OFF,
I Air conditioner switch is OFF,
I Rear window defogger switch is OFF,
I Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
1
INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related problem, or a current need for scheduled
maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
I Harness connectors for improper connections
I Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
I Wiring for improper connections, pinches and cuts
I Air cleaner clogging
I Hoses and ducts for leaks
SEF983U
©
2
GO TO 2.
CHECK THROTTLE OPENER OPERATION-I
Confirm that there is a clearance between throttle drum and stopper.
SEF950Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
EC-102
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK THROTTLE OPENER FIXING BOLTS
Check throttle opener fixing bolts for loosening.
MA
OK or NG
OK
©
1. Repair or replace throttle body assembly.
2. GO TO 2.
NG
©
1. Retighten the fixing bolts.
2. GO TO 2.
EM
LC
4
CHECK THROTTLE OPENER OPERATION-II
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Confirm that throttle opener rod moves backward and there is a clearance between throttle drum and throttle opener
rod.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF951Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
TF
PD
AX
CHECK VACUUM SOURCE FOR THROTTLE OPENER
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to throttle opener.
2. Check vacuum existance with engine running.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF952Y
BT
OK or NG
OK
©
1. Repair or replace throttle body assembly.
2. GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 6.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-103
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
6
CHECK VACUUM HOSE
1. Stop engine.
2. Remove the vacuum hose.
3. Check the vacuum hose for splits, kinks and clogging.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK
©
1. Clean vacuum port by blowing air.
2. GO TO 4.
NG
©
1. Replace vacuum hose.
2. GO TO 4.
7
CHECK THROTTLE DRUM OPERATION
Confirm that throttle drum moves to contact the stopper.
SEF950Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
8
CHECK ACCELERATOR WIRE INSTALLATION
1. Stop engine.
2. Check accelerator wire for slack.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
1. Adjust accelerator wire. Refer to FE-3, “Adjusting Accelerator Wire”.
2. GO TO 7.
EC-104
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
9
GI
CHECK THROTTLE VALVE OPERATION
1. Remove intake air ducts.
2. Check throttle valve operation when moving throttle drum by hand.
MA
OK or NG
OK
©
1. Retighten the throttle drum fixing nuts.
2. GO TO 7.
NG
©
1. Clean the throttle body and throttle valve.
2. GO TO 7.
10
EM
LC
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I
NOTE:
Always check ignition timing before performing the following.
1. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump as shown below.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF793WA
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum is free from the throttle opener
rod.
With CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 11.
Without CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 15.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-105
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
11
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Read “CLSD THL/P SW” signal under the following conditions.
I Insert a 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between stopper and throttle drum as
shown in the figure and check the signal.
SEF953Y
SEF987Y
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “ON” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “OFF” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 12.
EC-106
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
12
GI
ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I
With CONSULT-II
1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts.
2. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to test No. 10. During adjustment, vacuum should be applied.
3. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF953Y
4. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches to “OFF”.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF954Y
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF007Z
©
GO TO 13.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-107
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
13
ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches from “OFF” to
“ON”, then temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts.
SEF954Y
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Make sure two or three times that the signal is “ON” when the throttle valve is closed and “OFF” when it is opened.
Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
Make sure two or three times that the signal remains “OFF” when the throttle valve is closed.
Tighten throttle position sensor.
Check the “CLSD THL/P SW” signal again.
The signal remains “OFF” while closing throttle valve.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 12.
EC-108
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
14
GI
RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY
With CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Always warm up engine to normal operating temperature. If engine is cool, the throttle position sensor idle position memory will not be reset correctly.
1. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to Test No. 10.
2. Attach blind cap to vacuum port from which vacuum hose to throttle opener was disconnected.
3. Start engine.
4. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
5. Select “TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
6. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.)
7. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF864V
8. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until “CLSD THL POS” signal changes to “ON”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF987Y
©
BR
GO TO 19.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-109
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
15
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II
1. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 6 and 5 under the following conditions.
SEF330Z
I Insert the 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between the stopper and throttle drum
as shown in the figure.
SEF953Y
“Continuity should exist” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
“Continuity should not exist” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
GO TO 16.
EC-110
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
16
GI
ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I
1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts.
2. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to Test No. 10. During adjustment, vacuum should be applied.
3. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure.
MA
EM
LC
SEF953Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF330Z
TF
4. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until continuity does not exist.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF954Y
©
ST
GO TO 17.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-111
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
17
ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II
1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when the continuity comes to exist, then temporarily
tighten sensor body fixing bolts.
SEF954Y
2. Make sure two or three times that the continuity exists when the throttle valve is closed and continuity does not exist
when it is opened.
3. Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
4. Make sure two or three times that the continuity does not exist when the throttle valve is closed.
5. Tighten throttle position sensor.
6. Check the continuity again.
Continuity does not exist while closing the throttle valve.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
GO TO 16.
18
RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY
NOTE:
Always warm up engine to normal operating temperature. If engine is cool, the throttle position sensor idle position memory will not be reset correctly.
1. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to Test No. 10.
2. Attach blind cap to vacuum port from which vacuum hose to throttle opener was disconnected.
3. Start engine.
4. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
5. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.)
6. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF864V
7. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7, 20 times.
©
GO TO 19.
EC-112
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
19
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
GI
CHECK (1ST TRIP) DTC
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Release vacuum from throttle opener.
Remove vacuum pump and vacuum hose from throttle opener.
Reinstall original vacuum hose to throttle opener securely.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Rev (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times.
Make sure no (1st trip) DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 21.
NG
©
GO TO 20.
20
REPAIR MALFUNCTION
MA
EM
LC
FE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.
©
21
GO TO 19.
CL
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 30.
NG
©
GO TO 22.
SU
BR
22
PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-58.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
ST
CMPLT or INCMP
RS
CMPLT
©
GO TO 23.
INCMP
©
1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Leaning”.
2. GO TO 22.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-113
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
23
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 28.
NG
©
GO TO 24.
24
REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE
Replace IACV-AAC valve.
©
25
GO TO 25.
PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-58.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT
©
GO TO 26.
INCMP
©
1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 22.
26
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 28.
NG
©
GO TO 27.
EC-114
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
27
GI
CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely
the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-75.
©
28
MA
EM
GO TO 22.
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
LC
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.
FE
CL
MT
SEF572X
Ignition timing:
M/T 15°±5° BTDC
A/T 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 36.
NG
©
GO TO 29.
29
CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
AT
TF
PD
AX
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-29, “Installation”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 27.
NG
©
1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 22.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-115
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
30
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.
SEF572X
Ignition timing:
M/T 15°±5° BTDC
A/T 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 36.
NG
©
GO TO 31.
31
PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-58.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT
©
GO TO 32.
INCMP
©
1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 31.
32
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 34.
NG
©
GO TO 33.
33
CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-75.
©
GO TO 31.
EC-116
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
34
GI
CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
Check ignition timing again. Refer to Test No. 30.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 36.
NG
©
GO TO 35.
35
CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
MA
EM
LC
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-29, “Installation”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 33.
NG
©
1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 31.
36
CL
ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC No. might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
Refer to “How to Erase Emission-Related Diagnostic Information”, EC-73 and AT-35, “HOW TO ERASE DTC”.
©
FE
INSPECTION END
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-117
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
NAEC0039
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart.
Priority
Detected items (DTC)
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
P0100 Mass air flow sensor
P0110 Intake air temperature sensor
P0115 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
P0120 Throttle position sensor
P0180 Fuel tank temperature sensor
P0325 Knock sensor
P0335 P1336 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
P0460 P0461 P0464 P1464 Fuel level sensor
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
P0605 ECM
P1320 Ignition signal
P1335 Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
P1605 A/T diagnosis communication line
P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
P0105 Absolute pressure sensor
P0130-P0134, P0150-P0154 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
P0135 P0155 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
P0137-P0140, P0157-P0160 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
P0141 P0161 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) heater
P0217 Coolant overtemperature enrichment protection
P0443 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
P0446 P1446 P1448 EVAP canister vent control valve
P0450 EVAP control system pressure sensor
P0510 Closed throttle position switch
P0705-P0755 P1705 P1760 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P1140 Intake valve timing control position sensor
P1165 Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch
P1441 EVAP control system (VERY SMALL LEAK)
P1447 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
P1490 P1491 Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
P0306 - P0300 Misfire
P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
P0440 P1440 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK)
P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK)
P0505 IACV-AAC valve
P0600 A/T communication line
P0731-P0734 P0744 A/T function
P1110 Intake valve timing control
P1130 Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
P1148 P1168 Closed loop control
EC-118
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Fail-safe Chart
Fail-safe Chart
=NAEC0040
The ECM enters fail-safe mode, if any of the following malfunctions is detected due to the open or short circuit. When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates.
DTC No.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0100
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0115
Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after
turning ignition switch “ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition
P0120
Throttle position sensor circuit
40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes
after ignition ON or Start
80°C (176°F)
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
Driving condition
When engine is idling
When accelerating
P1335
Unable to
access ECM
Poor acceleration
Compression TDC signal (120° signal) is controlled by camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) signal and crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal. Ignition timing will be
delayed 0° to 2°.
ECM
ECM fail-safe activating condition
The computing function of the ECM was judged to be malfunctioning.
When the fail-safe system activates (i.e., if the ECM detects a malfunction condition in the CPU of ECM), the MIL on the instrument panel lights to warn the driver.
However it is not possible to access ECM and DTC cannot be confirmed.
Engine control with fail-safe
When ECM fail-safe is operating, fuel injection, ignition timing, fuel pump operation,
IACV-AAC valve operation and cooling fan operation are controlled under certain
limitations.
ECM fail-safe operation
Engine speed will not rise more than 3,000
rpm
Fuel injection
Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system
Ignition timing
Ignition timing is fixed at the preset valve
Fuel pump relay is “ON” when engine is running
and “OFF” when engine stalls
Fuel pump
LC
CL
MT
AT
Normal
Crankshaft position sensor
(REF) circuit
Engine speed
EM
FE
Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the
engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Condition
MA
Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
ON or Start
Except as shown above
GI
IACV-AAC valve
Full open
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
Replace ECM, if ECM fail-safe condition is confirmed.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-119
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart
Symptom Matrix Chart
NAEC0041
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
NAEC0041S01
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AH
AJ AK AL AM HA
2
2
3
4
4
2
2
4
4
Fuel pump circuit
1
1
2
3
2
Fuel pressure regulator system
3
3
4
4
4
Injector circuit
1
1
2
3
2
4
4
4
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
AA AB AC AD AE AF AG
ENGINE STALL
IDLING VIBRATION
Fuel
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Warranty symptom code
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
4
4
2
Positive crankcase ventilation system
EC-40
2
EC-619
EC-32
3
4
4
4
3
1
Incorrect idle speed adjustment
Ignition
EC-628
4
Evaporative emission system
Air
Reference
page
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
EC-38
EC-102
IACV-AAC valve circuit
1
1
2
3
3
Incorrect ignition timing adjustment
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
EC-102
Ignition circuit
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
EC-501
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
Main power supply and ground circuit
2
2
3
Air conditioner circuit
3
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
EC-120
EC-424
EC-144
3
3
2
HA section
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
GI
Engine
control
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
MA
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
AH
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AA AB AC AD AE AF AG
ENGINE STALL
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Warranty symptom code
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
EM
Reference
page
FE
CL
AJ AK AL AM HA
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
circuit
EC-512
2
2
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
circuit
EC-336, 519
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) circuit
3
EC-344
Mass air flow sensor circuit
1
2
EC-152
EC-194
1
2
3
2
1
Throttle position sensor circuit
Incorrect throttle position sensor
adjustment
3
1
1
Vehicle speed sensor circuit
2
3
3
Knock sensor circuit
2
2
3
3
EC-171, 189
2
2
EC-176
1
1
1
2
Start signal circuit
2
2
3
1
1
3
EC-102
EC-419
3
3
3
3
3
TF
PD
2
2
ECM
3
3
EC-330
EC-446, 119
AX
SU
BR
ST
EC-624
Park/Neutral position switch circuit
Power steering oil pressure switch
circuit
MT
AT
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
circuit
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
LC
3
3
2
3
3
Electrical load signal circuit
3
EC-606
EC-637
EC-647
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-121
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
NAEC0041S02
Fuel
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
AH
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AA AB AC AD AE AF AG
ENGINE STALL
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Warranty symptom code
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
Reference
section
AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel tank
FE section
5
Fuel piping
Vapor lock
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Valve deposit
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline,
Low octane)
Air
5
—
Air duct
Air cleaner
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — throttle
body)
Throttle body, Throttle wire
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
FE section
Air leakage from intake manifold/
Collector/Gasket
Cranking
—
Battery
1
1
1
1
Alternator circuit
1
1
1
1
EL section
Starter circuit
3
Flywheel/Drive plate
6
EM section
PNP switch
4
AT section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
EC-122
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
GI
Engine
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
MA
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
AH
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AA AB AC AD AE AF AG
ENGINE STALL
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Warranty symptom code
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
EM
Reference
section
LC
FE
AJ AK AL AM HA
CL
5
MT
Cylinder head
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Cylinder head gasket
4
3
Cylinder block
Piston
AT
4
Piston ring
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
TF
6
Connecting rod
EM section
Bearing
PD
Crankshaft
Valve
Timing chain
mechanism
Camshaft
AX
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
SU
Intake valve
3
Exhaust valve
Exhaust
Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket
BR
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
FE section
Three way catalyst
Lubrication
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
filter/Oil gallery
ST
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
Cooling
MA, EM, LC
section
LC section
Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
Thermostat
Water pump
BT
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
RS
4
5
HA
Water gallery
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
coolant
MA section
SC
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
EL
IDX
EC-123
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System —
NATS)
1
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
AH
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AA AB AC AD AE AF AG
ENGINE STALL
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Warranty symptom code
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
Reference
section
AJ AK AL AM HA
EC-75 or EL
section
1
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0042
Remarks:
I Specification data are reference values.
I Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
I If the real-time diagnosis results are NG and the on board diagnostic system results are OK when diagnosing the mass air flow sensor,
first check to see if the fuel pump control circuit is normal.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
ENG SPEED
CKPS·RPM (POS)
I Tachometer: Connect
I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
value.
Almost the same speed as
the CONSULT-II value.
POS COUNT
I Engine: Running
179 - 181
MAS A/F SE-B1
I
I
I
I
COOLAN TEMP/S
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
Idle
1.2 - 1.8V
2,500 rpm
1.6 - 2.2V
I Engine: After warming up
More than 70°C (158°F)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 1.0V
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
I Engine: After warming up
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 1.0V
LEAN +, RICH
EC-124
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
GI
VHCL SPEED SE
I Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CONSULT-II value
Almost the same speed as
the CONSULT-II value
BATTERY VOLT
I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
11 - 14V
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Throttle valve: fully closed
0.15 - 0.85V
EM
I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Throttle valve: fully opened
3.5 - 4.7V
LC
THRTL POS SEN
START SIGNAL
I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON
CLSD THL POS
CLSD THL/P SW
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
AIR COND SIG
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
P/N POSI SW
PW/ST SIGNAL
I Ignition switch: ON
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
OFF , ON , OFF
Throttle valve: Idle position
ON
Throttle valve: Slightly open
OFF
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
OFF
Air conditioner switch: “ON”
(Compressor operates.)
ON
Shift lever: “P” or “N”
ON
Except above
OFF
Steering wheel in neutral position
(forward direction)
OFF
The steering wheel is turned
ON
IGNITION SW
I Ignition switch: ON , OFF , ON
INJ PULSE-B2
INJ PULSE-B1
I
I
I
I
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
Idle
2.4 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm
1.9 - 2.8 msec
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
Idle
2.0 - 3.2 msec
B/FUEL SCHDL
I
I
I
I
2,000 rpm
1.4 - 2.6 msec
I
I
I
I
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
Idle
15°±5° BTDC
2,000 rpm
More than 25° BTDC
I
I
I
I
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
Idle
2 - 10 step
2,000 rpm
—
I
I
I
I
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
Idle
0%
2,000 rpm
—
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
54 - 155%
IGN TIMING
IACV-AAC/V
PURG VOL C/V
MA
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
ON , OFF , ON
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
A/F ALPHA-B2
A/F ALPHA-B1
I Engine: After warming up
EVAP SYS PRES
I Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 3.4V
AIR COND RLY
I Air conditioner switch: OFF , ON
OFF , ON
I Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 5 seconds)
I Engine running and cranking
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY
Except as shown above
OFF
EC-125
RS
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Ignition switch: ON
OFF
I Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
ON
I Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
OFF
I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
I Engine speed: Above 3,200 rpm
OFF
I Engine speed: Below 3,200 rpm [After driving for 2 minutes at a speed
of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more]
ON
VC/V BYPASS/V
Ignition switch: ON
OFF
CAL/LD VALUE
I
I
I
I
VENT CONT/V
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
ABSOL TH·P/S
MASS AIRFLOW
ABSOL PRES/SE
SWRL CONT S/V
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
Idle
14.0 - 33.0%
2,500 rpm
12.0 - 25.0%
I Engine: After warming up
Throttle valve: fully closed
0.0%
I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Throttle valve: fully opened
Approx. 80%
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
I
I
I
I
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
I Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 4.4V
Engine coolant temperature is
between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C
(122°F).
I Engine speed: Idle
ON
Engine coolant temperature is above
OFF
55°C (131°F).
SWL CON VC SW
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V TIM (B2)
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
I Engine speed: Idle
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C (122°F).
OFF
I Engine speed: Idle
I Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C (131°F).
ON
I Engine: After warming up
I Shift lever “N”
I Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
I No-load
Idle
I Engine: After warming up
I Shift lever “N”
I Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
I No-load
Idle
2,000 rpm
2,000 rpm
0° CA
Approximately 12 - 18° CA
0%
Approximately 40%
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0043
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
THRTL POS SEN, ABSOL TH·P/S, CLSD THL POS
NAEC0043S01
Below is the data for “THRTL POS SEN”, “ABSOL TH·P/S” and “CLSD THL POS” when depressing the accelerator pedal with the ignition switch “ON”.
The signal of “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH·P/S” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or
rise after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
EC-126
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF306Y
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL POS SEN, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
NAEC0043S02
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL POS SEN”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and
“INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF241Y
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-127
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
SEF242YA
EC-128
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1.
NAEC0044
GI
NAEC0044S01
ECM is located behind the instrument lower cover. For this
inspection, remove instrument lower cover.
MA
EM
LC
SEF955Y
2.
Remove ECM harness protector.
FE
CL
MT
3.
I
I
I
Perform all voltage measurements with the connector connected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily.
Open harness securing clip to make testing easier.
Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
MEC486B
ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUTNAEC0044S02
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF970W
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
HA
NAEC0044S03
Specification data are reference values and are measured between
each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring the input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use ground other than the ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
EC-129
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
1
L/Y
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
SEF994U
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100
seconds after starting engine).
SEF995U
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
17
R/G
L/OR
R/W
P/B
PU/G
GY
Y
GY/L
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 2)
heater
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 1)
heater
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 2)
heater
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 1)
heater
IACV-AAC valve
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.
I After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h
(43 MPH) or more.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.
I After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h
(43 MPH) or more.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
0.1 - 14V
EC-130
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
GI
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
MA
Battery voltage
EM
7 - 8V
13
OR/B
Intake valve timing
control solenoid valves
(RH)
LC
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
SEF350Z
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Battery voltage
FE
CL
7 - 8V
15
P/L
Intake valve timing
control solenoid valves
(LH)
MT
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
AT
SEF350Z
16
Y/G
VIAS control solenoid
valve
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
TF
PD
AX
0 - 0.2V★
SU
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
21
22
23
30
31
32
Y/R
G/R
L/R
GY
PU/W
GY/R
Ignition
Ignition
Ignition
Ignition
Ignition
Ignition
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
BR
SEF399T
ST
0.1 - 0.3V★
RS
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
BT
SEF645T
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-131
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
7 - 8V★
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SEF579X
25
W/G
Tachometer
7 - 8V★
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
SEF580X
26
27
28
29
L/B
L/G
R/L
G
ECM relay
(Self shutt-off)
Air conditioner relay
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
I For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
“OFF”
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
I A few seconds passed after turning ignition
switch “OFF”
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”
(Compressor is operating).
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I A/C switch is “OFF”.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I For 1 second after turning ignition switch “ON”
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I 1 second passed after turning ignition switch
“ON”.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Fuel pump relay
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15 50°C (59 - 122°F).
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
I Idle speed
I Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C
(131°F).
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
38
OR
MIL
39
G/W
Vacuum cut valve
bypass valve
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
40
G/Y
EVAP canister vent
control valve
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-132
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
42
43
44
45
47
GI
WIRE
COLOR
B/Y
R
L
B/R
R/B
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
MA
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “START”]
9 - 12V
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Gear position is “Neutral position” (M/T models).
Gear position is “P” or “N” (A/T models).
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Except the above gear position
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
FE
[Engine is running]
I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”.
Approximately 0V
CL
[Engine is running]
I A/C switch is “OFF”.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
I Steering wheel is being turned.
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Steering wheel is not being turned.
Approximately 5V
Start signal
Ignition switch
PNP switch
Air conditioner switch
signal
Power steering oil
pressure switch
EM
LC
MT
AT
48
B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Engine ground
TF
51
B/R
A/C cut signal
[Engine is running]
I Air conditioner is operating.
0 - 0.5V
PD
[Engine is running]
I Rear window defogger: ON
I Hi-beam headlamp: ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
AX
[Engine is running]
I Electrical load: OFF
0V
SU
Approximately 5V
BR
52
55
56
PU
W/B
OR/W
Electrical load signal
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15 Swirl control valve con50°C (59 - 122°F).
trol vacuum check
[Engine is running]
switch
I Idle speed
I Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C
(131°F).
[Engine is running]
Throttle position switch I Accelerator pedal fully released
(Closed position)
[Engine is running]
I Accelerator pedal depressed
ST
0 - 1.0V
RS
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BT
Approximately 0V
HA
57
B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Engine ground
58
B/P
Sensors’ ground
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V
59
B
Fuel level sensor
ground
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V
SC
EL
IDX
EC-133
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
61
WIRE
COLOR
OR
ITEM
Mass air flow sensor
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
1.2 - 1.8V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.6 - 2.2V
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
62
G/B
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF059V
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
63
G
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF059V
64
Y/PU
Intake air temperature
sensor
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
intake air temperature.
Approximately 2.3V★
(AC voltage)
65
75
LG
LG
Crankshaft position
sensor (REF)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SEF581X
Approximately 4.2V★
(AC voltage)
66
76
L
L
[Engine is running]
Camshaft position senI Warm-up condition
sor (PHASE)
I Idle speed
SEF582X
12
67
W/R
Power supply for ECM
(Buck-up)
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
70
LG/R
Engine coolant temperature sensor
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
engine coolant temperature.
EC-134
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
71
GI
WIRE
COLOR
OR/L
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
MA
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
EM
72
OR
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
73
B/P
Mass air flow sensor
ground
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V
Approximately 0.5V
FE
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
79
Y/G
Intake valve timing
control position sensors (RH)
CL
SEF351Z
Approximately 0.5V
TF
SEF352Z
81
82
L/R
Absolute pressure sen[Ignition switch “ON”]
sor
W/PU
Refrigerant pressure
sensor
W
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
Throttle position sensor I Accelerator pedal fully released
signal output
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”.
(Compressor operates.)
MT
AT
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
80
LC
PD
Approximately 4.4V
AX
0.36 - 3.88V
SU
BR
Approximately 0.4V
ST
Approximately 4V
83
Y/PU
Fuel level sensor
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
fuel level.
84
L/G
EVAP control system
pressure sensor
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 3.4V
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-135
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.4V
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
85
Y
SEF057V
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS)
Approximately 2.3V
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF058V
Approximately 2.5V
[Engine is running]
I Jack up front wheels.
I In 1st gear position
I 10 km/h (6 MPH)
SEF583X
86
W/L
Vehicle speed sensor
Approximately 2.0V
[Engine is running]
I Jack up front wheels.
I In 2nd gear position
I 30 km/h (19 MPH)
SEF584X
approximately 0.5V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
89
OR
Intake valve timing
control position sensors (LH)
SEF351Z
approximately 0.5V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
SEF352Z
EC-136
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
91
GI
WIRE
COLOR
R
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
Throttle position sensor I Accelerator pedal fully released
92
G/B
Fuel tank temperature
sensor
93
W
Knock sensor
101
102
103
104
105
107
R/B
L/W
R/W
PU/R
R/Y
R/L
Injector
Injector
Injector
Injector
Injector
Injector
106
108
B
B
110
112
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
1
5
2
6
3
4
DATA (DC Voltage)
MA
0.15 - 0.85V
EM
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Accelerator pedal fully depressed
3.5 - 4.7V
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
fuel tank temperature.
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Approximately 2.5V
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
FE
ECM ground
Engine ground
B/W
B/W
Power supply for ECM
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
111
P/B
Sensors’ power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
114
G/R
Communication line
(LAN)
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Approximately 2V
Data link connector
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected.
Approximately 2V
LG/R
CL
MT
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
115
LC
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-137
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Description
Description
NAEC0717
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
I B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correction)
I A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
I MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition
NAEC0718
I Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,100 miles)
I Barometric pressure: 101.3 kPa (760.0 mmHg, 29.92 inHg)±3 kPa (22.5 mmHg, 0.89 inHg)
I Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
I Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
I Transmission: Warmed-up*1
I Electrical load: Not applied*2
I Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates less than 0.9V. For M/T models, drive vehicle for 10
minutes after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Cooling fans are not operating. Steering wheel is straight ahead.
Inspection Procedure
SEF601Z
NAEC0719
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-139.
EC-138
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
NAEC0720
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF613ZB
EC-139
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
SEF768Z
EC-140
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF615Z
IDX
EC-141
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Description
Description
NAEC0045
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer’s complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I
occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred
may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific problem area.
COMMON I/I REPORT SITUATIONS
NAEC0045S01
STEP in Work Flow
Situation
II
The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or “[1t]”.
III
The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV
(1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI
The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the problem area.
Diagnostic Procedure
1
INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION — RELATED INFORMATION”, EC-73.
©
2
GO TO 2.
CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI-30, “GROUND INSPECTION”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
3
SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-25, “Incident Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
4
CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-22, “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
Repair or replace connector.
EC-142
NAEC0046
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0648
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
26
43
48
WIRE
COLOR
L/B
R
B
GI
MA
EM
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
LC
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
I For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
“OFF”
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
I A few seconds passed after turning ignition
switch “OFF”
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
FE
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
0V
CL
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Engine ground
[Probe this terminal with (–)
tester probe when measuring]
Engine ground
ECM relay
(Self shutt-off)
Ignition switch
57
B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
12
67
W/R
Power supply for ECM
(Buck-up)
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
108
B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Engine ground
110
112
B/W
B/W
Power supply for ECM
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-143
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
NAEC0047
MEC940C
EC-144
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC941C
IDX
EC-145
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1
NAEC0049
INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 9.
No
©
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 43 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF291X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I 10A fuse
I Harness connectors M33, F22
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ignition switch
©
4
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 48, 57, 106, 108 and engine ground.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-146
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II
1. Disconnect ECM relay.
MA
EM
LC
SEF681UB
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF956Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 6.
6
PD
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I 7.5A and 10A fuses
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery
©
7
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
SU
BR
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 26 and ECM relay terminal 2.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
Go to “DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL”, EC-501.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
8
TF
RS
BT
HA
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1 and M32, F23
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and ECM
©
ST
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-147
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
9
CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 67 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF293X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
GO TO 10.
10
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1 and M32, F23
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
©
11
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF294X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 17.
NG (Battery voltage
does not exist.)
©
GO TO 12.
NG (Battery voltage
exists for more than a
few seconds.)
©
GO TO 14.
EC-148
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
12
GI
CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Disconnect ECM relay.
MA
EM
LC
SEF681UB
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 7 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF957Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
13
PD
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and 7.5A fuse
©
TF
SU
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BR
14
CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY-V
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF331Z
SC
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
GO TO 15.
EL
IDX
EC-149
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
15
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1
I Harness connectors M94, F27
I 10A fuse.
©
16
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ECM relay terminal 6.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
GO TO 17.
17
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1 and M32, F23
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ECM relay
©
18
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
SEF296X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 19.
NG
©
Replace ECM relay.
19
CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 48, 57, 106, 108 and engine ground.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 20.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-150
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
20
GI
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
MA
INSPECTION END
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-151
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF958Y
NAEC0050
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0051
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAS A/F SE-B1
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
CONDITION
I
I
I
I
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
1.2 - 1.8V
2,500 rpm
1.6 - 2.2V
Idle
14.0 - 33.0%
2,500 rpm
12.0 - 25.0%
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
ditto
ditto
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0649
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
61
WIRE
COLOR
OR
ITEM
Mass air flow sensor
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
1.2 - 1.8V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.6 - 2.2V
73
B/P
Mass air flow sensor
ground
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V
111
P/B
Sensors’ power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
EC-152
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0053
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) an excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM when engine is not running,
(Malfunction B) an excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent
to ECM when engine is running,
(Malfunction C) a high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under light load driving condition,
(Malfunction D) a low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under heavy load driving condition,
(Malfunction E) a voltage from the sensor is constantly approx.
1.0V when engine is running.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
MA
EM
LC
NAEC0053S02
When the malfunction B is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode
and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
GI
FE
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Mass air flow sensor circuit
CL
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
MT
Possible Cause
MALFUNCTION A OR C
I
I
I
I
NAEC0426
NAEC0426S01
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Mass air flow sensor
MALFUNCTION B, D OR E
I
AT
PD
NAEC0426S02
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Intake air leaks
Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
TF
AX
SU
NAEC0054
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first.
If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND E”.
If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B AND E”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
If there is no problem on ”PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
C”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION D”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-153
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0054S01
NAEC0054S0101
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 6 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-157.
With GST
NAEC0054S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND E
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0054S0201
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-157.
With GST
SEF058Y
NAEC0054S02
NAEC0054S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is confirmed after more than 5 seconds, there may
be malfunction C.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
NAEC0054S03
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with
engine stopped (Ignition switch “ON”) instead of running engine at
idle speed.
With CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC0054S0301
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-157.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-154
NAEC0054S0302
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION D
NAEC0054S04
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
SEF243Y
MA
NAEC0054S0402
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-157.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check the voltage of MAS AIR/FL SE with “DATA MONITOR”.
Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-157.
If OK, go to following step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL POS SEN
More than 3V
Selector lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)
will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
8)
GI
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-157.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF175Y
Overall Function Check
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION D
NAEC0055
NAEC0055S01
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow
sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST
SEF534P
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC0055S0101
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MODE 1” with GST.
Check the mass air flow sensor signal with “MODE 1”.
Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-157.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-155
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0056
MEC942C
EC-156
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0057
GI
INSPECTION START
MA
Which malfunction (A, B, C, D or E) is duplicated?
EM
MTBL0373
LC
Type I or Type II
Type I
©
GO TO 3.
Type II
©
GO TO 2.
2
FE
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
I Air duct
I Vacuum hoses
I Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold collector
CL
MT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Reconnect the parts.
3
AT
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
TF
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF959Y
ST
©
GO TO 4.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-157
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK MAFS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (MAFS) harness connector.
SEF960Y
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between MAFS terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF297X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor
I Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
©
6
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK MAFS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between MAFS terminal 3 and ECM terminal 73.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-158
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK MAFS INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAFS terminal 1 and ECM terminal 61.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8
LC
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF298X
TF
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAFS harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Replace mass air flow sensor.
9
PD
AX
SU
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-159
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0725
The absolute pressure sensor detects ambient barometric pressure
and sends the voltage signal to the ECM. As the pressure
increases, the voltage rises.
SEF052V
SEF946SB
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0726
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
80
L/R
Absolute pressure sen[Ignition switch “ON”]
sor
Approximately 4.4V
111
P/B
Sensors’ power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
58
B/P
Sensors’ ground
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0727
Malfunction is detected when an excessively low or high voltage
from the sensor is sent to ECM.
EC-160
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0728
Harness or connectors
(Absolute pressure sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Absolute pressure sensor
GI
MA
EM
LC
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0729
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
FE
CL
MT
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
AT
NAEC0729S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-163.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
NAEC0729S02
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF058Y
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-161
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
=NAEC0730
MEC013D
EC-162
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0731
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
©
2
CL
GO TO 2.
MT
CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Disconnect absolute pressure sensor harness connector.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF961Y
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
SU
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace harness connector.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-163
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between absolute pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF299X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair harness or connectors.
4
CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between absolute pressure sensor terminal 3 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM and absolute pressure sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and absolute pressure sensor
©
6
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 80 and absolute pressure sensor terminal 2.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-164
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
Install a vacuum pump to absolute pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 80 and engine ground under the following
conditions.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF300XA
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (–700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg) or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Replace absolute pressure sensor.
8
CL
MT
AT
TF
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
PD
INSPECTION END
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-165
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0064
The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
<Reference data>
Intake air
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
SEF962Y
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
80 (176)
1.23
0.27 - 0.38
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 64
(Intake air temperature sensor) and body ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0065
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM,
(Malfunction B) rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent
to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant
temperature sensor.
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0428
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Intake air temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0066
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st trip
DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
EC-166
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0066S01
NAEC0066S0101
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-169.
With GST
GI
NAEC0066S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
MA
EM
LC
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NAEC0066S02
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the
shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be
easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
With CONSULT-II
1)
SEF176Y
a)
b)
c)
d)
I
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
NAEC0066S0201
Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C
(194°F).
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check the engine coolant temperature.
If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C
(194°F), turn ignition switch “OFF” and cool down engine.
Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature
is above 90°C (194°F).
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100
consecutive seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-169.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
NAEC0066S0202
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-167
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0067
MEC014D
EC-168
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0068
GI
CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect intake air temperature sensor harness connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEF962Y
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF301X
PD
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
AX
SU
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1
I Harness connectors M33, F22
I Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor
©
3
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-169
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1
I Harness connectors M33, F22
I Harness for open between ECM and intake air temperature sensor
I Harness for open between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and intake air temperature sensor
©
5
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF302X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace intake air temperature sensor.
6
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-170
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0069
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
SEF012P
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
−10 (14)
4.4
7.0 - 11.4
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
2.2
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.9
0.236 - 0.260
FE
CL
MT
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 70
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0070
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high or low voltage
from the sensor is sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC0070S02
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode
and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch
“ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II
display)
Condition
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start
40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
Start
80°C (176°F)
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
Except as shown above
BR
EL
IDX
EC-171
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0429
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Engine coolant temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0071
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0071S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-174.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-172
NAEC0071S02
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0072
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC015D
EC-173
IDX
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0073
CHECK ECTS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS) harness connectors F112, F28.
SEF370Z
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between ECTS harness connector F28 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF371Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F112, F28
I Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
©
3
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK ECTS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between ECTS terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
EC-174
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F112, F28
I Harness for open between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
I Harness for open between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and engine coolant temperature sensor
©
5
MA
EM
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
LC
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
6
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
AX
SU
BR
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-175
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Description
Description
NAEC0074
NOTE:
If DTC P0120 is displayed with DTC P0510, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0510. Refer to
EC-433.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAEC0074S01
The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal
to the ECM.
Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the “Wide open and closed
throttle position switch”, which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control.
AEC929
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0075
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL POS SEN
ABSOL TH·P/S
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Throttle valve: fully closed
0.15 - 0.85V
I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Throttle valve: fully opened
3.5 - 4.7V
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Throttle valve: fully closed
0.0%
I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Throttle valve: fully opened
Approx. 80%
EC-176
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
=NAEC0651
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
91
MA
EM
WIRE
COLOR
R
GI
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
LC
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
Throttle position sensor I Accelerator pedal fully released
0.15 - 0.85V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Accelerator pedal fully depressed
3.5 - 4.7V
111
P/B
Sensors’ power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
58
B/P
Sensors’ ground
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V
FE
CL
MT
AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0077
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM,
(Malfunction B) a high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under light load driving conditions,
(Malfunction C) a low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under heavy load driving conditions.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
PD
AX
NAEC0077S02
When the malfunction A is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode
and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
TF
SU
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
BR
Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Throttle position sensor
circuit
Condition
ST
Driving condition
When engine is idling
Normal
When accelerating
RS
Poor acceleration
BT
Possible Cause
MALFUNCTION A
I
I
I
I
NAEC0430S02
Harness or connectors
(The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Throttle position sensor
Fuel injector
EC-177
HA
NAEC0430S01
Harness or connectors
(The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Throttle position sensor
MALFUNCTION B
I
NAEC0430
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
I
I
I
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Mass air flow sensor
MALFUNCTION C
I
I
I
NAEC0430S03
Harness or connectors
(The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Intake air leaks
Throttle position sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0078
NOTE:
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the
1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B”.
If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NAEC0078S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
I This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in
the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is
expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
Vehicle speed
More than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position except “P” or “N” position
3)
SEF065Y
NAEC0078S0101
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-183.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-178
NAEC0078S0102
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
SEF058Y
Suitable position except “P” or “N”
Brake pedal
Depressed
Vehicle speed
0 km/h (0 MPH)
MA
EM
LC
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-183.
With GST
GI
NAEC0078S0201
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
If idle speed is over 1,000 rpm, maintain the following conditions for at least 10 seconds to keep engine speed below 1,000
rpm.
Selector lever
4)
NAEC0078S02
NAEC0078S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
FE
CL
MT
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
AT
NAEC0078S03
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
SEF177Y
5)
6)
7)
I
I
TF
NAEC0078S0301
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Select “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH·P/S” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Press RECORD on CONSULT-II SCREEN at the same time
accelerator pedal is depressed.
Print out the recorded graph and check the following:
The voltage rise is linear in response to accelerator pedal
depression.
The voltage when accelerator pedal is fully depressed is
approximately 4V.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-183.
If OK, go to following step.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-179
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
SEF174Z
8)
Select “AUTO TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
9)
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 2,000 rpm
MAS A/F SE-B1
More than 3.2V
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
Selector lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)
will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
SEF178Y
10) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-183.
With GST
1)
2)
NAEC0078S0302
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
Gear position
Suitable position
Engine speed
More than 2,000 rpm
Engine coolant temperature
More than 70°C (158°F)
SEF305X
EC-180
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
Voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground
3)
4)
More than 3.2V
Select “MODE 7” with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-183.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-181
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0079
MEC016D
EC-182
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0080
GI
INSPECTION START
MA
Which malfunction A, B or C is duplicated?
EM
MTBL0066
LC
Type A, B or C
Type A or B
©
GO TO 4.
Type C
©
GO TO 2.
FE
2
ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
CL
MT
AT
MTBL0653
©
TF
GO TO 3.
PD
3
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM.
AX
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check the following for connection.
I Air duct
I Vacuum hoses
I Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold collector
SU
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Reconnect the parts.
4
BR
ST
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
RS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF959Y
©
IDX
GO TO 5.
EC-183
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector.
SEF944Y
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between throttle position sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF964Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 3 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle position sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and throttle position sensor
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-184
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
GI
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 91 and throttle position sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 9.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
LC
FE
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
Apply vacuum [more than –40.0kPa (–300mmHg, –11.81inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of the
throttle opener.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
8. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF062Y
HA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
GO TO 11.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-185
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
MTBL0231
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
GO TO 11.
11
ADJUST CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
MTBL0653
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
EC-186
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
GI
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconneted.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
MA
EM
LC
SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
FE
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 13.
NG
©
Replace mass air flow sensor.
13
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure” for DTC P0335 and P1336. Refer to EC-338, 521.
MT
AT
TF
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
PD
AX
14
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure” for DTC P1335. Refer to EC-513.
SU
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 15.
NG
©
Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-187
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
SEF964XB
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
Replace fuel injector.
16
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-188
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Description
Description
NAEC0081
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0115, first perform the trouble
diagnosis for DTC P0115. Refer to EC-171.
GI
MA
EM
LC
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAEC0081S01
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
FE
CL
MT
SEF594K
AT
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
SEF012P
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
−10 (14)
4.4
9.2
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
2.2
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.9
0.236 - 0.260
TF
PD
AX
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 70
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0082
Malfunction is detected when voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not practical, even when some time has passed after starting the engine, or engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-189
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
I
NAEC0431
Harness or connectors
(High resistance in the circuit)
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Thermostat
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0083
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC0083S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-192.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-190
NAEC0083S02
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0084
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC015D
EC-191
IDX
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0085
CHECK ECTS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connectors F112, F28.
SEF370Z
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between ECTS harness connector F28 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF371Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F112, F28
I Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
©
3
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK ECTS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between ECTS terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
EC-192
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F112, F28
I Harness for short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
I Harness for short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and engine coolant temperature sensor
©
5
MA
EM
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
LC
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
6
CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
AX
SU
BR
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant
does not flow.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to LC-17, “Thermostat”.
7
ST
RS
BT
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-193
DTC P0130, P0150 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(CIRCUIT)
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0086
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal airfuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0087
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0652
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
63
G
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF059V
EC-194
DTC P0130, P0150 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(CIRCUIT)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
GI
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
MA
EM
62
G/B
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
LC
SEF059V
FE
CL
MT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
AT
NAEC0089
Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
signal is not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately 0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output
voltage is within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks that this time is not inordinately long.
Malfunction is detected when the voltage from the sensor is constantly approx. 0.3V.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF237U
Possible Cause
I
I
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
NAEC0432
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-195
DTC P0130, P0150 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(CIRCUIT)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
SEF332Z
NAEC0090
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NAEC0090S01
1)
2)
SEF333Z
SEF645Y
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2) P0130/P0150” of “HO2S1” in “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Touch “START”.
4) Let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4.
5) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.)
ENG SPEED
1,500 - 2,800 rpm
Vehicle speed
70 - 100 km/h (43 - 62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
3.0 - 10 msec
Selector lever
Suitable position
6)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-200.
During this test, P1148 and P1168 may be stored in ECM.
Overall Function Check
NAEC0091
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
NAEC0091S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank
1 right signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 left signal) and engine
ground.
SEF308XB
EC-196
DTC P0130, P0150 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(CIRCUIT)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
3)
I
4)
Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-200.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-197
DTC P0130, P0150 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
=NAEC0092
NAEC0092S01
MEC947C
EC-198
DTC P0130, P0150 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0092S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC948C
EC-199
IDX
DTC P0130, P0150 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0093
INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
3. Make sure HO2S1 (front) harness protector color, and disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
SEF505Y
SEF965Y
SEF966Y
©
GO TO 2.
EC-200
DTC P0130, P0150 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MA
EM
LC
MTBL0471
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
FE
CL
MTBL0472
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
MT
OK or NG
AT
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-201
DTC P0130, P0150 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF967Y
6. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647Y
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
EC-202
DTC P0130, P0150 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 right signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 left signal) and
engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
CL
MT
AT
TF
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF505Y
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©
ST
RS
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
BT
6
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
HA
INSPECTION END
SC
EL
IDX
EC-203
DTC P0131, P0151 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(LEAN SHIFT MONITORING)
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0094
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal airfuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0095
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0653
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
63
G
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF059V
EC-204
DTC P0131, P0151 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(LEAN SHIFT MONITORING)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
GI
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
MA
EM
62
G/B
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
LC
SEF059V
FE
CL
MT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
AT
NAEC0097
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is
sufficiently high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low.
When both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected.
Malfunction is detected when the maximum and minimum voltage
from the sensor are not reached to the specified voltages.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF300U
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0433
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
Fuel pressure
Injectors
Intake air leaks
BR
ST
RS
BT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0098
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
I Before performing following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
EC-205
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0131, P0151 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(LEAN SHIFT MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
NAEC0098S01
1)
2)
3)
SEF334Z
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2) P0131/
P0150” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED
1,300 - 2,800 rpm
Vehicle speed
80 - 100 km/h (50 - 62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
3 - 10 msec
Selector lever
Suitable position
SEF335Z
7)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-207.
SEF651Y
Overall Function Check
NAEC0099
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
SEF308XB
3)
I
I
4)
NAEC0099S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (Right bank
HO2S1 signal) or 62 (Left bank HO2S1 signal) and engine
ground.
Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-207.
EC-206
DTC P0131, P0151 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(LEAN SHIFT MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0100
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
©
2
CL
GO TO 2.
RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
©
MT
AT
TF
GO TO 3.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-207
DTC P0131, P0151 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(LEAN SHIFT MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF968Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-73.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Yes or No
Yes
©
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-296.
No
©
GO TO 4.
EC-208
DTC P0131, P0151 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(LEAN SHIFT MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER 1 (FRONT)
1. Stop engine.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
MA
EM
LC
SEF505Y
3. Disconnect HO2S1 harness connector.
4. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF969Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-209
DTC P0131, P0151 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(LEAN SHIFT MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF967Y
6. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647Y
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
EC-210
DTC P0131, P0151 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(LEAN SHIFT MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 right signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 left signal) and
engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
CL
MT
AT
REPLACE FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
TF
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
PD
7
AX
SU
BR
SEF505Y
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©
ST
RS
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
BT
8
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
For circuit, refer to “DTC P0130 (RIGHT BANK 1), P0150 (LEFT BANK 2) HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
[HO2S1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)] (CIRCUIT)”, EC-194.
©
HA
SC
INSPECTION END
EL
IDX
EC-211
DTC P0132, P0152 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RICH SHIFT MONITORING)
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0101
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal airfuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0102
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0654
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
63
G
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF059V
EC-212
DTC P0132, P0152 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RICH SHIFT MONITORING)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
GI
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
MA
EM
62
G/B
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
LC
SEF059V
FE
CL
MT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
AT
NAEC0104
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is
sufficiently high. The “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be
detected.
Malfunction is detected when the maximum and minimum voltages
from the sensor are beyond the specified voltages.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF299U
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
NAEC0434
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
Fuel pressure
Injectors
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
BR
ST
RS
BT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0105
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
EC-213
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0132, P0152 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RICH SHIFT MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
NAEC0105S01
1)
2)
3)
SEF336Z
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2) P0132/
P0152” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED
1,300 - 2,800 rpm
Vehicle speed
80 - 100 km/h (50 - 62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
3 - 10 msec
Selector lever
Suitable position
SEF337Z
7)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-215.
SEF655Y
Overall Function Check
NAEC0106
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
SEF308XB
3)
I
I
4)
NAEC0106S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank
1 right signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 left signal) and engine
ground.
Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time.
The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-215.
EC-214
DTC P0132, P0152 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RICH SHIFT MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0107
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
©
2
CL
GO TO 2.
RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
©
MT
AT
TF
GO TO 3.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-215
DTC P0132, P0152 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RICH SHIFT MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF968Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-73.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Yes or No
Yes
©
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-304.
No
©
GO TO 4.
4
CHECK HO2S 1 (FRONT) CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505Y
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
4. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EC-216
DTC P0132, P0152 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RICH SHIFT MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) HEATER
Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
MA
EM
LC
SEF969Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-217
DTC P0132, P0152 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RICH SHIFT MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF967Y
6. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647Y
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
EC-218
DTC P0132, P0152 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RICH SHIFT MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 right signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 left signal) and
engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
8
CL
MT
AT
TF
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF505Y
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©
ST
RS
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
BT
9
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
For circuit, refer to “DTC P0130 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0150 (LEFT BANK, -B2) HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 [HO2S1
(FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)] (CIRCUIT)”, EC-194.
©
HA
SC
INSPECTION END
EL
IDX
EC-219
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0108
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal airfuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0109
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0655
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
63
G
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF059V
EC-220
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
GI
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
MA
EM
62
G/B
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
LC
SEF059V
FE
CL
MT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
AT
NAEC0111
To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front), this
diagnosis measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed
and load), fuel feedback control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the
compensated time [heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) cycling time
index] is inordinately long or not.
Malfunction is detected when the response of the voltage signal
from the sensor takes more than the specified time.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF010V
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
Fuel pressure
Injectors
Intake air leaks
Exhaust gas leaks
PCV valve
Mass air flow sensor
NAEC0435
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-221
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0112
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NAEC0112S01
1)
2)
3)
SEF338Z
SEF339Z
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2) P0133/
P0153” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 40 to 50 seconds.)
ENG SPEED
1,600 - 3,100 rpm (A/T)
1,800 - 3,100 rpm (M/T)
Vehicle speed
80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
5 - 12 msec (A/T)
5 - 15 msec (M/T)
Selector lever
Suitable position
7)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-226.
SEF658Y
EC-222
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Overall Function Check
Overall Function Check
NAEC0113
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
SEF308XB
3)
I
4)
NAEC0113S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank
1 right signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 left signal) and engine
ground.
Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0
- 0.3V
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-226.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-223
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
NAEC0114
NAEC0114S01
MEC947C
EC-224
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0114S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC948C
EC-225
IDX
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0115
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
©
2
GO TO 2.
RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
©
3
GO TO 3.
CHECK FOR EXHAUST AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst.
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
4
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
EC-226
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF968Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
CL
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-73.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
MT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Yes or No
Yes
©
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-296,
304.
No
©
GO TO 6.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-227
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) HARNESS PROTECTOR COLOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector.
SEF505Y
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
SEF965Y
SEF966Y
©
GO TO 7.
EC-228
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and front HO2S terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MA
EM
LC
MTBL0473
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or FRONT HO2S terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
FE
CL
MTBL0474
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
MT
OK or NG
AT
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
TF
8
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
PD
Check resistance between HO2S1 (front) terminals as follows.
AX
SU
BR
SEF969Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
ST
RS
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-229
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Replace mass air flow sensor.
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK PCV VALVE
Install all removed parts.
Start engine and let it idle.
Remove PCV valve ventilation hose from PCV valve.
Make sure that a hissing noise will be heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be felt immediately
when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
SEC137A
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Replace PCV valve.
EC-230
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF967Y
6. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF647Y
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
BT
HA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-231
DTC P0133, P0153 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 right signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 left signal) and
engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
13
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505Y
©
14
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-232
DTC P0134, P0154 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0116
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal airfuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF463R
FE
CL
MT
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0117
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
PD
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
WIRE
COLOR
NAEC0656
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
63
G
TF
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
AT
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 1)
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SC
SEF059V
EL
IDX
EC-233
DTC P0134, P0154 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
62
G/B
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF059V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0119
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated
oxygen sensor 1 (front) output is not inordinately high.
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
SEF301UA
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0436
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0120
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0120S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EC-234
DTC P0134, P0154 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
5)
6)
Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-238.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
I
GI
MA
NAEC0120S02
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.
Select “MODE 3” with GST.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-238.
When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-235
DTC P0134, P0154 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
NAEC0121
NAEC0121S01
MEC947C
EC-236
DTC P0134, P0154 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0121S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC948C
EC-237
IDX
DTC P0134, P0154 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0122
INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505Y
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
SEF965Y
SEF966Y
©
2
GO TO 2.
RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
©
GO TO 3.
EC-238
DTC P0134, P0154 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MA
EM
LC
MTBL0475
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
FE
CL
MTBL0476
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
MT
OK or NG
AT
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
TF
4
CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
PD
AX
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 6.
SU
NG
©
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-239
DTC P0134, P0154 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF967Y
6. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown left:
SEF647Y
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
EC-240
DTC P0134, P0154 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 right signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 left signal) and
engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
CL
MT
AT
TF
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF505Y
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©
ST
RS
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
BT
8
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
HA
INSPECTION END
SC
EL
IDX
EC-241
DTC P0135, P0155 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) (BANK
1)/(BANK 2)
Description
Description
NAEC0123
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NAEC0123S01
Sensor
ECM function
Input Signal to ECM
Actuator
Heated
oxygen
sensor 1
heater
(front) control
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heaters (front)
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heaters (front) corresponding to the engine
speed.
OPERATION
NAEC0123S02
Engine speed
rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heaters (front)
Above 3,600
OFF
Below 3,600
ON
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0124
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
ON
I Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0657
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
3
2
WIRE
COLOR
L/OR
R/G
ITEM
Heated oxygen sensor
1 heater (front) (bank
1)
Heated oxygen sensor
1 heater (front) (bank
2)
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-242
DTC P0135, P0155 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) (BANK
1)/(BANK 2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0126
Malfunction is detected when the current amperage in the heated
oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) circuit is out of the normal range.
[An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM through the heated
oxygen sensor 1 heater (front).]
GI
MA
EM
LC
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0437
Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) circuit is open or
shorted.)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
FE
CL
MT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
AT
NAEC0127
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
PD
AX
NAEC0127S01
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT.
Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-246.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
I
TF
NAEC0127S02
Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
Select “MODE 3” with GST.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-246.
When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-243
DTC P0135, P0155 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) (BANK
1)/(BANK 2)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
NAEC0128
NAEC0128S01
MEC949C
EC-244
DTC P0135, P0155 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) (BANK
1)/(BANK 2)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0128S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC950C
EC-245
IDX
DTC P0135, P0155 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) (BANK
1)/(BANK 2)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0129
CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505Y
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
SEF965Y
SEF966Y
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between HO2S1 (front) terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF970Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
EC-246
DTC P0135, P0155 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) (BANK
1)/(BANK 2)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) and fuse
©
3
MA
EM
Repair harness or connectors.
LC
CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
FE
CL
MTBL0520
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
AT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
MT
TF
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
PD
Check resistance between HO2S1 (front) terminals as follows.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF969Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-247
DTC P0135, P0155 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) (BANK
1)/(BANK 2)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505Y
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©
6
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-248
DTC P0137, P0157 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF327R
NAEC0130
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
GI
MA
EM
LC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0131
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
I Engine: After warming up
Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
AT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
WIRE
COLOR
CL
MT
NAEC0658
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
FE
ITEM
CONDITION
OR
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
71
OR/L
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
PD
AX
DATA (DC Voltage)
72
TF
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0133
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving
condition such as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when the minimum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage.
SEF304UB
EC-249
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0137, P0157 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
NAEC0438
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
Fuel pressure
Injectors
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0134
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF340Z
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
SEF341Z
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
NAEC0134S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
Select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2) P0137/P0157” of “HO2S2” in “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If NG is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-254.
If “CANNOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
Stop engine and cool down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates
less than 70°C (158°F).
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Return to step 6 again when the “COOLAN TEMP/S” reaches
to 70°C (158°F).
SEF342Z
Overall Function Check
NAEC0135
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0135S01
Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
Stop vehicle with engine running.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank
SEF312XB
EC-250
DTC P0137, P0157 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
4)
5)
6)
1 right signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 left signal) and engine
ground.
Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.57V at least once during
this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be below 0.57V at least once during
this procedure.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-254.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-251
DTC P0137, P0157 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
=NAEC0136
NAEC0136S01
MEC951C
EC-252
DTC P0137, P0157 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0136S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC952C
EC-253
IDX
DTC P0137, P0157 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0137
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
©
2
GO TO 2.
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF968Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-73.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Yes or No
Yes
©
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-304.
No
©
GO TO 3.
EC-254
DTC P0137, P0157 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
MA
EM
LC
SEF372Z
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF971Y
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and rear HO2S terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
TF
PD
AX
SU
MTBL0521
Continuity should exist.
6. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
BR
ST
RS
MTBL0522
Continuity should not exist.
7. Also check harness for short to power.
BT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-255
DTC P0137, P0157 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULTII.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF972Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.62V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.57V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
EC-256
DTC P0137, P0157 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank 1 right signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 left signal) and
engine ground.
4. Check the voltage when rewing up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF313XA
MT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
AT
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
TF
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.57V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
PD
AX
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
8
SU
BR
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignitioin switch OFF.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF372Z
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
EC-257
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0137, P0157 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-258
DTC P0138, P0158 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF327R
NAEC0138
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
GI
MA
EM
LC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0139
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
I Engine: After warming up
Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
AT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
WIRE
COLOR
CL
MT
NAEC0659
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
FE
ITEM
CONDITION
OR
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
71
OR/L
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
PD
AX
DATA (DC Voltage)
72
TF
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0141
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the various
driving condition such as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when the maximum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage.
SEF303UB
EC-259
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0138, P0158 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0439
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
Fuel pressure
Injectors
Intake air leaks
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0142
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF663Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
SEF664Y
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
NAEC0142S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
Select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2) P0138/P0158” of “HO2S2” in “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If NG is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-264.
If “CANNOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
Stop engine and cool down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates
less than 70°C (158°F).
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Return to step 6 again when the “COOLAN TEMP/S” reaches
to 70°C (158°F).
SEF665Y
Overall Function Check
NAEC0143
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0143S01
Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
Stop vehicle with engine running.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank
SEF312XB
EC-260
DTC P0138, P0158 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
4)
5)
6)
1 right signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 left signal) and engine
ground.
Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.62V at least once during
this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be above 0.62V at least once during
this procedure.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-264.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-261
DTC P0138, P0158 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
=NAEC0144
NAEC0144S01
MEC951C
EC-262
DTC P0138, P0158 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0144S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC952C
EC-263
IDX
DTC P0138, P0158 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0145
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
©
2
GO TO 2.
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF968Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-73.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Yes or No
Yes
©
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-296.
No
©
GO TO 3.
EC-264
DTC P0138, P0158 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
MA
EM
LC
SEF372Z
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF971Y
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
TF
PD
AX
SU
MTBL0523
Continuity should exist.
6. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
BR
ST
RS
MTBL0524
Continuity should not exist.
7. Also check harness for short to power.
BT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-265
DTC P0138, P0158 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULTII.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF972Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.62V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.57V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
EC-266
DTC P0138, P0158 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank 1 right signal) or 71 (HO2S bank 2 left signal) and
engine ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF313XA
MT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
AT
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
TF
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.57V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
PD
AX
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
8
SU
BR
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check rear heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF372Z
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
EC-267
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0138, P0158 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-268
DTC P0139, P0159 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF327R
NAEC0146
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
GI
MA
EM
LC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0147
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
I Engine: After warming up
Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
AT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
WIRE
COLOR
CL
MT
NAEC0660
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
FE
ITEM
CONDITION
OR
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
71
OR/L
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
PD
AX
DATA (DC Voltage)
72
TF
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0149
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor’s voltage is faster than specified during
the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when it takes more time for the sensor to
respond between rich and lean than the specified time.
SEF302U
EC-269
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0139, P0159 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0440
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
Fuel pressure
Injectors
Intake air leaks
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0150
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF666Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
SEF667Y
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
NAEC0150S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
Select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2) P0139/P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If NG is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-274.
If “CANNOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
Stop engine and cool down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates
less than 70°C (158°F).
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Return to step 6 again when the “COOLAN TEMP/S” reaches
to 70°C (158°F).
SEF668Y
Overall Function Check
NAEC0151
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the rear heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0151S01
Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
Stop vehicle with engine running.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank
SEF312XB
EC-270
DTC P0139, P0159 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
4)
5)
6)
1 right signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 left signal) and engine
ground.
Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-274.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-271
DTC P0139, P0159 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
=NAEC0152
NAEC0152S01
MEC951C
EC-272
DTC P0139, P0159 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0152S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC952C
EC-273
IDX
DTC P0139, P0159 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0153
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
©
2
GO TO 2.
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF968Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Make sure 1st trip DTC No. 0100 is displayed.
Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-73.
7. Make sure DTC No. 0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Yes or No
Yes
©
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-296,
304.
No
©
GO TO 3.
EC-274
DTC P0139, P0159 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
MA
EM
LC
SEF372Z
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF971Y
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
TF
PD
AX
SU
MTBL0525
Continuity should exist.
6. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
BR
ST
RS
MTBL0526
Continuity should not exist.
7. Also check harness for short to power.
BT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-275
DTC P0139, P0159 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors
5
CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULTII.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF972Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.62V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.57V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
EC-276
DTC P0139, P0159 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank 1 right signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 left signal) and
engine ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF313XA
MT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
AT
CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
TF
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.57V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
PD
AX
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
8
SU
BR
REPLACE REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF372Z
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
EC-277
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0139, P0159 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(RESPONSE MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-278
DTC P0140, P0160 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF327R
NAEC0154
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
GI
MA
EM
LC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0155
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
I Engine: After warming up
Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
AT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
WIRE
COLOR
CL
MT
NAEC0661
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
FE
ITEM
CONDITION
OR
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
71
OR/L
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
PD
AX
DATA (DC Voltage)
72
TF
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0157
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the voltage
is unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuelcut.
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
SEF305UA
EC-279
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0140, P0160 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0441
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0158
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
SEF189Y
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC0158S01
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
Stop vehicle with engine running.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
1,300 - 3,100 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
64 - 130 km/h (40 - 80 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
0.5 - 6.4 msec
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
Selector lever
Suitable position
6)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-284.
Overall Function Check
NAEC0159
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0159S01
Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
Stop vehicle with engine running.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank
SEF312XB
EC-280
DTC P0140, P0160 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
4)
5)
1 right signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 left signal) and engine
ground.
Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 1.4V during this procedure.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-284.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-281
DTC P0140, P0160 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
NAEC0160
NAEC0160S01
MEC951C
EC-282
DTC P0140, P0160 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0160S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC952C
EC-283
IDX
DTC P0140, P0160 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0161
INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
3. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF372Z
4. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF971Y
5. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
©
GO TO 2.
EC-284
DTC P0140, P0160 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MA
EM
MTBL0527
LC
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
FE
MTBL0528
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
CL
MT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3
CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) CONNECTORS FOR WATER
Check heated oxygen sensor connector 2 (rear) and harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-285
DTC P0140, P0160 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULTII.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF972Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.62V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.57V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
6
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank 1 right signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 left signal) and
engine ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
SEF313XA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
EC-286
DTC P0140, P0160 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.57V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
8
MA
EM
LC
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
FE
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF372Z
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©
9
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
PD
AX
SU
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-287
DTC P0141, P0161 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) (BANK 1)/
(BANK 2)
Description
Description
NAEC0162
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NAEC0162S01
Sensor
ECM function
Input Signal to ECM
Actuator
Heated
oxygen
sensor
heater 2
(rear) control
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heaters (rear)
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heaters (rear) corresponding to the engine
speed.
OPERATION
NAEC0162S02
Engine speed rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heaters (rear)
Above 3,200
OFF
Below 3,200
ON
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0163
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
I Engine is running above 3,200 rpm.
OFF
I Engine is running below 3,200 rpm after driving for 2 minutes at a
speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more.
ON
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0662
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
5
4
WIRE
COLOR
P/B
R/W
ITEM
Heated oxygen sensor
2 heater (rear) (bank
1)
Heated oxygen sensor
2 heater (rear) (bank
2)
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.
I After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h
(43 MPH) or more.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.
I After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h
(43 MPH) or more.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-288
DTC P0141, P0161 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) (BANK 1)/
(BANK 2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0165
Malfunction is detected when the current amperage in the heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) circuit is out of the normal range.
[An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM through the heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear).]
GI
MA
EM
LC
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0442
Harness or connectors
[The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) circuit is open or
shorted.]
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
FE
CL
MT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
AT
NAEC0166
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
I
NAEC0166S02
Start engine.
Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds.
Select “MODE 3” with GST.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-293.
When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
EC-289
PD
AX
NAEC0166S01
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-293.
WITH GST
1)
2)
TF
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0141, P0161 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) (BANK 1)/
(BANK 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
EC-290
DTC P0141, P0161 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) (BANK 1)/
(BANK 2)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
NAEC0167
GI
NAEC0167S01
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC953C
EC-291
IDX
DTC P0141, P0161 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) (BANK 1)/
(BANK 2)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0167S02
MEC954C
EC-292
DTC P0141, P0161 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) (BANK 1)/
(BANK 2)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0168
GI
CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor harness 2 (rear) protector color.
EM
LC
FE
SEF372Z
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF971Y
PD
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground.
AX
SU
BR
SEF314X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
ST
RS
BT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) and fuse
©
Repair harness or connectors.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-293
DTC P0141, P0161 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) (BANK 1)/
(BANK 2)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0529
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR)
Check the resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
SEF315X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Check rear heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.
SEF372Z
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
EC-294
DTC P0141, P0161 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) (BANK 1)/
(BANK 2)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
MA
INSPECTION END
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-295
DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (LEAN)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0169
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual
mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio
based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen
sensors 1 (front). The ECM calculates the necessary compensation
to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large
(The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MIL
(2 trip detection logic).
Sensor
Heated oxygen sensors 1 (front)
Input Signal to ECM
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
ECM function
Fuel injection control
Actuator
Injectors
Malfunction is detected when fuel injection system does not operate properly, the amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large.
(The mixture ratio is too lean.)
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0487
Intake air leaks
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
Injectors
Exhaust gas leaks
Incorrect fuel pressure
Lack of fuel
Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0170
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
SEF968Y
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
NAEC0170S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARN CONTROL” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-300.
If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-300. If engine does
not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
EC-296
DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (LEAN)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEF960Y
NAEC0170S02
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is
detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC P0100.
7) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so,
go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-300.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-300. If engine does
not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-297
DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (LEAN)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
NAEC0171
NAEC0171S01
MEC955C
EC-298
DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (LEAN)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0171S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC956C
EC-299
IDX
DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0172
CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst.
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
2
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0477
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0478
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-300
DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-39.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-39.
At idling:
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected.
235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected.
294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
MA
EM
LC
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
FE
Check the following.
I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-628.)
I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-40.)
I Fuel lines (Refer to MA-17, “Checking Fuel Lines”.)
I Fuel filter for clogging
CL
©
6
MT
Repair or replace.
AT
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
TF
PD
AX
SU
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-152.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-301
DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF070Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-619.
EC-302
DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
GI
CHECK INJECTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect injector harness connectors on left bank (for DTC P0171), right bank (for DTC P0174).
Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EC-41.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
The injector harness connectors on right bank (for DTC P0171), left bank (for DTC P0174) should remain connected.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF595Q
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new
ones.
9
TF
PD
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
AT
INSPECTION END
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-303
DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (RICH)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0173
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual
mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio
based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen
sensors 1 (front). The ECM calculates the necessary compensation
to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large
(The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MIL
(2 trip detection logic).
Sensor
Heated oxygen sensors 1 (front)
Input Signal to ECM
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
ECM function
Fuel injection control
Actuator
Injectors
Malfunction is detected when fuel injection system does not operate properly, the amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large.
(The mixture ratio is too rich.)
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0488
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
Injectors
Exhaust gas leaks
Incorrect fuel pressure
Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0174
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
SEF968Y
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
NAEC0174S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARN CONTROL” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-308.
If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-308. If
engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for
fouling, etc.
EC-304
DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (RICH)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEF960Y
NAEC0174S02
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is
detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC P0100.
7) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so,
go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-308.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-308. If
engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-305
DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (RICH)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
NAEC0175
NAEC0175S01
MEC955C
EC-306
DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (RICH)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0175S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC956C
EC-307
IDX
DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (RICH)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0176
CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst.
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
2
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0479
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0480
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-308
DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (RICH)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-39.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-39.
At idling:
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected.
235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected.
294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
EM
LC
FE
Check the following.
I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-628.)
I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-40.)
©
MA
CL
Repair or replace.
MT
6
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
AT
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
PD
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-152.
TF
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-309
DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION (RICH)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF070Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-620.
8
CHECK INJECTOR
1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EC-41.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors left bank (for DTC P0172), right bank (for P0175).
The injector harness connectors on right bank (for P0172), left bank (for P0175) should remain connected.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)
©
GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.)
©
Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
9
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-310
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0177
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF751UA
<Reference data>
Fuel temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
3.5
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
2.2
0.79 - 0.90
CL
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 92
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and body ground.
SEF012P
FE
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0178
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high or low voltage is
sent to ECM, rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM, compared
with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.
BR
ST
RS
BT
Possible Cause
I
I
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
NAEC0489
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-311
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0179
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
SEF174Y
5)
6)
7)
NAEC0179S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-314.
If the result is OK, go to following step.
Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step.
Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F).
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-314.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-312
NAEC0179S02
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0180
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC957C
EC-313
IDX
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0181
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
SEF751UA
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF973Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B1, M2
I Harness connectors M92, F27
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
©
3
Repair harness or connector.
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2 and body ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-314
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 1 and 2 by heating with hot water or heat gun
as shown in the figure.
MA
EM
LC
SEF974Y
FE
OK or NG
CL
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
MT
5
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
AT
INSPECTION END
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-315
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0610
This diagnosis checks whether the engine coolant temperature is
extraordinary high, even when the load is not heavy.
When malfunction is detected, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
will light up even in the first trip.
Malfunction is detected when engine coolant temperature is excessively high under normal engine speed.
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0611
Thermostat
Improper ignition timing
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Blocked radiator
Blocked front end (Improper fitting of nose mask)
Crushed vehicle frontal area (Vehicle frontal is collided but not
repaired)
I Blocked air passage by improper installation of front fog lamp
or fog lamps.
I Improper mixture ratio of coolant
I Damaged bumper
For more information, refer to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF
OVERHEATING”, EC-321.
Overall Function Check
NAEC0612
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the coolant
overtemperature enrichment protection check, a DTC might not be
confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
burns could be caused by high-pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Carefully remove the cap
by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to
escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
I
I
SEF621W
a)
NAEC0612S01
Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester)
in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level and
mixture ratio.
If the coolant level in the reservoir and/or radiator is below the
proper range, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318.
If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%,
replace the coolant in the following procedure MA-15, “Changing Engine Coolant”.
Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed
EC-316
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
b)
c)
2)
3)
4)
5)
a)
6)
a)
b)
c)
7)
8)
of 2 liters per minute like pouring coolant from a kettle. Be sure
to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-13,
“Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”.
After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow
noise is emitted.
After checking or replacing coolant, go to step 3 below.
Ask the customer if engine coolant has been added. If it has
been added, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318. After
repair, go to the next step.
Start engine and let it idle.
Make sure that A/C switch is “OFF” and air conditioner is not
operating. If NG, check air conditioner circuit. Refer to HA-28
or HA-148, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”. After repair, go to the
next step.
Check for blocked coolant passage.
Warm up engine to normal operating temperature, then grasp
radiator upper hose and lower hose and make sure that coolant flows.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318. After repair, go
to the next step.
Be extremely careful not to touch any moving or adjacent
parts.
Check for blocked radiator air passage.
When market fog lamps have been installed, check for damaged fans and clogging in the condenser and radiator.
Check the front end for clogging caused by insects or debris.
Check for improper fitting of front-end cover, damaged radiator grille or bumper, damaged vehicle front.
If NG, take appropriate action and then go to the next step.
Check function of ECT sensor.
Refer to step 7 of “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318.
If NG, replace ECT sensor and go to the next step.
Check ignition timing. Refer to basic inspection, EC-102.
Make sure that ignition timing is 15°±5° at idle.
If NG, adjust ignition timing and then recheck.
WITH GST
1)
I
I
a)
b)
c)
2)
3)
NAEC0612S02
Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester)
in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level and
mixture ratio.
If the coolant level in the reservoir and/or radiator is below the
proper range, and go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318.
If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%,
replace the coolant in the following procedure MA-15, “Changing Engine Coolant”.
Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed
of 2 liters per minute like pouring coolant from a kettle. Be sure
to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-13,
“Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”.
After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow
noise is emitted.
After checking or replacing coolant, go to step 3 below.
Ask the customer if engine coolant has been added. If it has
been added, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318. After
repair, go to the next step.
Start engine and let it idle.
EC-317
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
4)
5)
a)
6)
a)
b)
c)
7)
8)
Make sure that A/C switch is “OFF” and air conditioner is not
operating. If NG, check air conditioner circuit. Refer to HA-28
or HA-148, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”. After repair, go to the
next step.
Check for blocked coolant passage.
Warm up engine to normal operating temperature, then grasp
radiator upper hose and lower hose and make sure that coolant flows.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318. After repair, go
to the next step.
Be extremely careful not to touch any moving or adjacent
parts.
Check for blocked radiator air passage.
When market fog lamps have been installed, check for damaged fans and clogging in the condenser and radiator.
Check the front end for clogging caused by insects or debris.
Check for improper fitting of front-end cover, damaged radiator grille or bumper, damaged vehicle front.
If NG, take appropriate action and then go to the next step.
Check function of ECT sensor.
Refer to step 6 of “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318.
If NG, replace ECT sensor and go to the next step.
Check ignition timing. Refer to basic inspection, EC-102.
Make sure that ignition timing is 15°±5° at idle.
If NG, adjust ignition timing and then recheck.
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0614
CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
SLC754A
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
EC-318
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following for leak.
I Hose
I Radiator
I Water pump (Refer to LC-13, “Water Pump”.)
©
3
MA
EM
Repair or replace.
CHECK RADIATOR CAP
LC
Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief pressure.
FE
CL
MT
SLC755A
Radiator cap relief pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
AT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Replace radiator cap.
TF
PD
4
CHECK THERMOSTAT
AX
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SLC343
Valve opening temperature:
76.5°C (170°F) [standard]
Valve lift:
More than 8.6 mm/90°C (0.339 in/194°F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to LC-17, “Thermostat”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Replace thermostat
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-319
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
2. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
6
CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-321.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-320
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
Engine
Step
OFF
1
2
Inspection item
I
I
I
I
Blocked
Blocked
Blocked
Blocked
radiator
condenser
radiator grille
bumper
I Coolant mixture
Equipment
I Visual
Standard
No blocking
NAEC0615
GI
Reference page
—
MA
EM
I Coolant tester
50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-12, “RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS”.
LC
3
I Coolant level
I Visual
Coolant up to MAX level
in reservoir tank and
radiator filler neck
See MA-15, “Changing
Engine Coolant”.
4
I Radiator cap
I Pressure tester
59 - 98 kPa
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14
psi) (Limit)
See LC-12, “System
Check”.
ON*2
5
I Coolant leaks
I Visual
No leaks
See LC-12, “System
Check”.
ON*2
6
I Thermostat
I Touch the upper and
lower radiator hoses
Both hoses should be
hot
See LC-17, “Thermostat”
and LC-20, “Radiator”.
MT
ON*1
7*5
I Cooling fan
I CONSULT-II
Operating
See trouble diagnosis for
DTC P0217 (EC-316).
AT
OFF
8
I Combustion gas leak
I Color checker chemical tester 4 Gas analyzer
Negative
—
I Coolant temperature
gauge
I Visual
Gauge less than 3/4
when driving
I Coolant overflow to
reservoir tank
I Visual
No overflow during driving and idling
See MA-15, “Changing
Engine Coolant”.
I Coolant return from
I Visual
reservoir tank to radiator
Should be initial level in
reservoir tank
See MA-14, “ENGINE
MAINTENANCE”.
11
I Cylinder head
0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping)
See EM-43, “Inspection”.
12
I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual
tons
No scuffing on cylinder
walls or piston
See EM-64, “Inspection”.
ON*3
OFF*4
OFF
9
10
FE
CL
TF
—
PD
AX
SU
I Straight gauge feeler
gauge
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
*5: Cooling fan is not applied to this vehicle.
For more information, refer to LC-25, “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-321
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0182
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine
speed fluctuates enough to cause the CKP sensor signal to vary,
ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Input Signal to ECM
Engine speed
ECM function
On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL
will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP
sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not
damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC
on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not
damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC,
the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will
affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM
monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or
on multiple cylinders.
Malfunction is detected when multiple cylinders misfire, No. 1 cylinder misfires, No. 2 cylinder misfires, No. 3 cylinder misfires, No.
4 cylinder misfires, No. 5 cylinder misfires and No. 6 cylinder
misfires.
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Improper spark plug
Insufficient compression
Incorrect fuel pressure
The injector circuit is open or shorted
Injectors
Intake air leak
The ignition secondary circuit is open or shorted
Lack of fuel
Drive plate or flywheel
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
EC-322
NAEC0490
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0183
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NAEC0183S01
1)
SEF213Y
Turn ignition switch “ON”, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Start engine again and drive at 1,500 to 3,000 rpm for at least
3 minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
NOTE:
Refer to the freeze frame data for the test driving conditions.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-323.
WITH GST
1
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
NAEC0184
TF
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Discover air leak location and repair.
2
MA
NAEC0183S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
GI
CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
PD
AX
SU
1. Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace it.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-323
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
SEF190Y
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each ignition coil harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a
momentary engine speed drop?
SEF975Y
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 5.
No
©
GO TO 4.
4
CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle?
MEC703B
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 5.
No
©
Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-619.
EC-324
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK IGNITION SPARK
Disconnect ignition wire from spark plug.
Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition wire.
Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
Check for spark.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF575Q
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to “DTC P1320 IGNITION
SIGNAL”, EC-501
MT
AT
6
CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF156I
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to
MA-14, “ENGINE MAINTENANCE”.
BR
ST
RS
7
CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-14, “Measurement of Compression Pressure”.
Standard:
1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 185 psi)/300 rpm
Minimum:
981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm
Difference between each cylinder:
98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm
BT
HA
SC
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
EL
IDX
EC-325
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-39.
3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-39.
At idle:
Approx. 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
GO TO 9.
9
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-628.)
I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-40.)
I Fuel lines (Refer to MA-17, “Checking Fuel Lines”.)
I Fuel filter for clogging
©
10
Repair or replace.
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
MTBL0653
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Follow the “Basic Inspection”.
EC-326
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and “HI SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II, and select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and
“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
4. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF967Y
5. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown left:
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF647Y
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
BT
HA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-327
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 right signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 left signal) and
engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
13
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505Y
©
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
EC-328
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
14
GI
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
MA
EM
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
LC
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 15.
NG
©
Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-152.
15
FE
CL
CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in “Symptom Matrix Chart”, EC-120.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
16
MT
AT
ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
TF
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-73.
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
©
17
PD
GO TO 17.
AX
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
SU
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-329
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0185
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses
engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock
sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction.
The knock sensor has one trip detection logic.
SEF332I
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0663
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
93
WIRE
COLOR
W
ITEM
Knock sensor
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0187
Malfunction is detected when an excessively low or high voltage
from the knock sensor is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0491
Harness or connectors
(The knock sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Knock sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0188
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
SEF058Y
EC-330
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0188S01
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II
Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-333.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-331
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0189
MEC958C
EC-332
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0190
GI
CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 93 and engine ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF321X
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
AT
CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 93 and knock sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
3
TF
PD
AX
SU
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F19, F116
I Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
©
MT
BR
ST
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-333
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
SEF976Y
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Replace knock sensor.
5
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
Loose and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
©
6
GO TO 6.
CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F19, F116.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F19 terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F19, F116
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F19 and engine ground
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-334
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
GI
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
MA
INSPECTION END
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-335
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF977Y
NAEC0191
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan
facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects
the crankshaft position signal (1° signal).
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the gear
teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor
also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft
position signal (1° signal).
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0492
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CKPS·RPM (POS)
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Tachometer: Connect
Almost the same speed as the
I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II value.
value.
EC-336
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
=NAEC0664
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
GI
MA
EM
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
LC
Approximately 2.4V
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
FE
SEF057V
85
Y
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS)
Approximately 2.3V
CL
MT
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
AT
SEF058V
TF
PD
AX
SU
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0193
Malfunction is detected when 1° signal is not entered to ECM for
the first few seconds during engine cranking, or 1° signal is not
entered to ECM during engine running.
BR
ST
RS
BT
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0493
Harness or connectors
[The crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is open or
shorted.]
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Starter motor (Refer to EL section.)
Starting system circuit (Refer to EL section.)
Dead (Weak) battery
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-337
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0194
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0194S01
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Crank engine for at least two seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-340.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-338
NAEC0194S02
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0195
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC959C
EC-339
IDX
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0196
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
©
2
GO TO 2.
CHECK CKPS (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect harness connectors E132, E135.
SEF978Y
2. Check voltage between harness connector E135 terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF979Y
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
EC-340
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E132, E135
I Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
©
4
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK CKPS (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
MA
EM
LC
1. Check harness continuity between harness connector E135 terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
FE
CL
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E132, E135
I Harness connectors E116, M114
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Harness for open between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground
©
6
AT
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
TF
CHECK CKPS (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 85 and harness connector E135 terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
MT
AX
SU
BR
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E132, E135
I Harness connectors E116, M114
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
©
PD
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-341
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
CHECK CKPS (POS) SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect CKPS (POS) harness connector.
SEF980Y
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (POS) terminals and harness connector E132 terminals as follows.
MTBL0618
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
SEF981Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
EC-342
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II
1. Reconnect disconnected harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 85 and ground by briefly touching the sensor core with a flat-bladed screwdrivers.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF343Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
11
CHECK CKPS (POS) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect harness connectors E132, E135.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector E135 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 13.
NG
©
GO TO 12.
12
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E132, E135
I Harness connectors E116, M114
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Harness for open between harness connector E135 and engine ground
©
13
CL
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
SU
BR
ST
RS
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-343
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF252P
NAEC0197
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) is located on the engine
front cover facing the camshaft sprocket. It detects the cylinder No.
signal.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the
camshaft sprocket will periodically change. Permeability near the
sensor also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder No.
signal.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0665
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 4.2V★
(AC voltage)
66
76
L
L
[Engine is running]
Camshaft position senI Warm-up condition
sor (PHASE)
I Idle speed
SEF582X
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0199
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) the cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for the
first few seconds during engine cranking,
(Malfunction B) the cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM during
engine running,
(Malfunction C) the cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern
during engine running.
EC-344
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0494
Harness or connectors
[The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is open or
shorted.]
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Starter motor (Refer to SC section.)
Starting system circuit (Refer to SC section.)
Dead (Weak) battery
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1)
2)
3)
4)
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
NAEC0200S01
NAEC0200S0101
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-347.
With GST
MA
NAEC0200
NOTE:
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C”.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
GI
TF
PD
AX
NAEC0200S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SU
SEF013Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0200S02
NAEC0200S0201
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-347.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
BR
ST
RS
NAEC0200S0202
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-345
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0201
MEC961C
EC-346
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0202
CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
MA
Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
EM
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10, “STARTING SYSTEM”.)
2
GI
LC
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF959Y
©
3
TF
GO TO 3.
PD
CHECK CMPS (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
AX
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and CMPS (PHASE) harness connector.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF982Y
3. Check harness continuity between CMPS (PHASE) terminal 2 and ECM terminals 66, 76. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-347
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK CMPS (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between CMPS (PHASE) terminal 1 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
5
CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-I
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
2. Remove the CMPS (PHASE).
3. Visually check the CMPS (PHASE) for chipping.
SEF583P
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
6
CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-II
Check resistance between CMPS (PHASE) terminals 1 and 2 as shown below.
SEF325X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
7
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-348
DTC P0420 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0430 (LEFT BANK, -B2) THREE WAY
CATALYST FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
SEF484Y
NAEC0214
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen
sensors 1 (front) and 2 (rear).
A warm-up three way catalyst with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of rear heated oxygen sensor. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the rear heated oxygen sensor switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of front and rear heated oxygen sensors
approaches a specified limit value, the warm-up three way catalyst
malfunction is diagnosed.
Malfunction is detected when warm-up three way catalyst does not
operate properly, warm-up three way catalyst does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Warm-up three way catalyst
Exhaust tube
Intake air leaks
Injectors
Injector leaks
Spark plug
Improper ignition timing
AT
NAEC0504
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-349
DTC P0420 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0430 (LEFT BANK, -B2) THREE WAY
CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0215
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF344Z
SEF345Z
NAEC0215S01
TESTING CONDITION:
I Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
I Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified
minutes below.
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine.
4) Rev engine up to 3,000±500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive
minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
5) Wait 5 seconds at idle.
6) Rev engine up to 2,500±500 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP”
of CATALYST changes to “CMPLT” (It will take approximately
5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
7) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
8) Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-351.
SEF560X
Overall Function Check
NAEC0216
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the warm-up
three way catalyst. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
confirmed.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
WITH GST
1)
SEF329X
2)
3)
4)
5)
SEF330X
NAEC0216S01
Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
Stop vehicle with engine running.
Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminals 63 [heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) right bank signal], 62 [heated oxygen
sensor 1 (front) left bank signal] and engine ground, and ECM
terminals 72 [heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) right bank signal],
71 [heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) left bank signal] and engine
ground.
Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low)
between ECM terminals 72 and engine ground, or 71 and
engine ground is very less than that of ECM terminals 63 and
engine ground, or 62 and engine ground.
Switching frequency ratio = A/B
EC-350
DTC P0420 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0430 (LEFT BANK, -B2) THREE WAY
CATALYST FUNCTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
A: Rear heated oxygen sensor voltage switching frequency
B: Front heated oxygen sensor voltage switching frequency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means warm-up three way
catalyst does not operate properly. Go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-351.
NOTE:
If the voltage at terminal 62 or 63 does not switch periodically more
than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 5, perform trouble diagnosis for “DTC P0133, P0153” first. (See EC-220.)
Diagnostic Procedure
1
OK or NG
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
2
EM
LC
FE
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
©
MA
NAEC0217
CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
OK
GI
CL
MT
CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK
AT
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before the warm-up three way catalyst.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
3
BR
ST
CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
RS
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-351
DTC P0420 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0430 (LEFT BANK, -B2) THREE WAY
CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
MTBL0653
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Follow the “Basic Inspection”.
5
CHECK INJECTORS
1. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM for Injectors, EC-620.
2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 107 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF331X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure”, “INJECTOR”, EC-621.
EC-352
DTC P0420 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0430 (LEFT BANK, -B2) THREE WAY
CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GI
CHECK IGNITION SPARK
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly.
Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
Check for spark.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF575Q
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit. Refer to EC-501.
MT
AT
7
CHECK INJECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EC-41.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)
©
GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.)
©
Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
8
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
ST
Trouble is fixed.
©
INSPECTION END
Trouble is not fixed.
©
Replace warm-up three way catalyst.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-353
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0218
NOTE:
If DTC P0440 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-575.)
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine
intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the
line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is opened to clear the line
between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve. The EVAP canister vent control valve will then be
closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve is opened to depressurize the EVAP
purge line using intake manifold vacuum. After this occurs, the
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
SEF373Z
Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system has a leak,
EVAP control system does not operate properly.
CAUTION:
I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may
come on.
I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on.
I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0510
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve.
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
EC-354
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure
sensor
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the
circuit
Absolute pressure sensor
Fuel tank temperature sensor
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged.
Water separator
EVAP canister is saturated with water.
EVAP control system pressure sensor
Fuel level sensor and the circuit
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-355
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
SEF565X
NAEC0219
NOTE:
I If DTC P0440 or P1440 is displayed with P1448, perform
trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-575.)
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level
surface.
I Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
WITH CONSULT-II
NAEC0219S01
1)
2)
3)
SEF566X
SEF874X
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-102.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-357.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
WITH GST
SEF567X
NAEC0219S02
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving Pattern” on EC-67
before driving vehicle.
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving Pattern”, EC-67.
3) Stop vehicle.
4) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step.
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6) Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving Pattern”, EC-67.
8) Stop vehicle.
9) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
I If P0440 or P1440 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-357.
I If P1447 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P1447, EC-566.
EC-356
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
I
If P0440, P1440 and P1447 are not displayed on the screen,
go to the following step.
10) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0220
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
FE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
CL
MT
AT
SEF915U
TF
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
PD
AX
2
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
SU
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
I Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
I Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
BR
ST
3
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
RS
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-357
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
SEF427N
SEF943S
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
EC-358
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
MA
EM
LC
SEF983Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
Models with CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 6.
Models without CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 7.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-359
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
EC-360
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF598U
3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.)
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF599U
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-361
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Replace water separator.
9
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-377.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.
10
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
SEF596U
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 14.
EC-362
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
MA
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 13.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 12.
12
EM
LC
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
©
13
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FE
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
CL
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
MT
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100.0%.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF984Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
GO TO 15.
14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ST
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 17.
NG
©
GO TO 15.
BR
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-363
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-26.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 16.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 17.
NG
©
Repair or reconnect the hose.
16
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
GO TO 17.
EC-364
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
17
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
SEF986Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF334X
TF
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF986Y
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-365
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
18
CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
SEF961Y
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Install a vacuum pump to absolute pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 80 and engine ground under the following
conditions.
SEF300XA
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (–700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg) or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 19.
NG
©
Replace absolute pressure sensor.
19
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 1 and 2 by heating with hot water or heat gun
as shown in the figure.
SEF974Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 20.
NG
©
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
EC-366
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
20
GI
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m
(19.7in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 21.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
21
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-32.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 22.
NG
©
Repair or reconnect the hose.
22
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
©
GO TO 23.
EL
IDX
EC-367
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
23
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-128, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 24.
NG
©
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
24
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-368
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Description
Description
NAEC0221
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch
Start signal
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Throttle position switch
Closed throttle position
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Vehicle speed sensor
Vehicle speed
GI
NAEC0221S01
ECM
function
MA
Actuator
EM
LC
EVAP canEVAP canister purge volume
ister purge
control solenoid valve
flow control
FE
CL
MT
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow
rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the
flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the
air flow changes.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAEC0221S02
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF337U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
HA
CONDITION
SC
NAEC0222
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PURG VOL C/V
I
I
I
I
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle (Vehicle stopped)
0%
2,000 rpm
—
EL
IDX
EC-369
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0666
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
1
L/Y
SEF994U
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100
seconds after starting engine).
SEF995U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0224
Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the valve.
Possible Cause
I
I
Harness or connectors
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
EC-370
NAEC0511
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0225
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
Follow the proocedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
MA
EM
LC
NAEC0225S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-373.
WITH GST
GI
FE
NAEC0225S02
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-371
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0226
MEC962C
EC-372
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0227
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEF986Y
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or
tester.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF988Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
AX
SU
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse
©
Repair harness or connectors.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-373
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 1 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connetors.
4
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
EC-374
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF335X
PD
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
6
AX
SU
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-375
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF032W
NAEC0228
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other
evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.
SEF143S
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0229
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VENT CONT/V
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Ignition switch: ON
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0667
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
40
WIRE
COLOR
G/Y
ITEM
EVAP canister vent
control valve
CONDITION
[Ignition switch “ON”]
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
NAEC0231
Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through EVAP canister vent control valve.
EC-376
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0512
Harness or connectors
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
EVAP canister vent control valve
GI
MA
EM
LC
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0232
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
WITH GST
CL
MT
AT
NAEC0232S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-379.
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
FE
NAEC0232S02
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF058Y
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-377
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0233
MEC963C
EC-378
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0234
GI
INSPECTION START
MA
1. Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
GO TO 3.
EM
LC
2
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then turn “ON”.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF989Y
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-379
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
SEF143S
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF990Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M2, B1 and B43, B101
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and fuse
©
5
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 40 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 6.
EC-380
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B101, B43
I Harness connectors B1, M2 and M94, F27
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
©
7
MA
EM
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
LC
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
FE
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
CL
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
MT
8
AT
TF
PD
SEF337X
AX
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-381
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
GO TO 10.
10
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 9 again.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
11
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-382
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0235
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as
pressure increases. The EVAP control system pressure sensor is
not used to control the engine system. It is used only for on board
diagnosis.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF053V
FE
CL
MT
SEF954S
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0236
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
EVAP SYS PRES I Ignition switch: ON
NAEC0668
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
58
WIRE
COLOR
TF
PD
Approx. 3.4V
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
AT
AX
SU
BR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
ST
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V
B/P
Sensors’ ground
84
L/G
EVAP control system
pressure sensor
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 3.4V
111
P/B
Sensors’ power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-383
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0238
Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal from
EVAP control system pressure sensor is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0513
Harness or connectors
(The EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
Rubber hose to EVAP control system pressure sensor is
clogged, vent, kinked, disconnected or improper connection.
EVAP control system pressure sensor
EVAP canister vent control valve
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
EVAP canister
Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent control valve to water
separator
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0239
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
EC-384
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
WITH GST
SEF194Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
NAEC0239S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-387.
MA
EM
LC
NAEC0239S02
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that voltage between ECM terminal 92 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
Select “MODE 7” with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-387.
SEF340X
GI
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-385
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0240
MEC017D
EC-386
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0241
GI
CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check rubber tube connected to the EVAP control system pressure sensor for clogging, vent, kink, disconnection or
improper connection.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF495R
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Reconnect, repair or replace.
2
MT
AT
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF959Y
BR
©
GO TO 3.
ST
3
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair or replace harness connector.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-387
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF992Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B101, B43
I Harness connectors B1, M2 and M94, F27
I Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
©
6
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B101, B43
I Harness connectors B1, M2 and M94, F27
I Harness for open between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
I Harness for open between EVAP control system pressure sensor and TCM (Transmission Control Module)
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-388
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 84 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
GI
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 10.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
GO TO 9.
LC
FE
9
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B101, B43
I Harness connectors B1, M2 and M94, F27
I Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor
©
10
CL
MT
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AT
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
GO TO 11.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-389
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF986Y
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF986Y
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
EC-390
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
GI
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
MA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 13.
NG
©
Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
13
EM
LC
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
FE
CL
MT
SEF337X
AT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-391
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
14
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
GO TO 15.
15
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 14 again.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
EC-392
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
16
GI
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
SU
OK or NG
BR
OK
©
GO TO 17.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
17
CHECK RUBBER TUBE
Check obstructed rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
Clean rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-393
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
18
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 19.
NG
©
Replace water separator.
19
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
SEF596U
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 20.
No
©
GO TO 22.
20
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 22.
NG
©
GO TO 21.
EC-394
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
21
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
©
22
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
MA
EM
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
LC
INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-395
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0644
NOTE:
If DTC P0455 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-575.)
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.)
in EVAP system between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve.
SEF373Z
Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system has a very large
leak such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does not
operate properly.
CAUTION:
I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may
come on.
I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on.
I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0645
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve.
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
EC-396
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure
sensor
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the
circuit
Absolute pressure sensor
Fuel tank temperature sensor
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged.
EVAP control system pressure sensor
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-397
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
SEF565X
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF566X
SEF874X
NAEC0646S01
1)
2)
3)
4)
Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
5) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-102.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and
make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If
it is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-399.
If P0440 is displayed, perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0440.
WITH GST
SEF567X
NAEC0646
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:
I If DTC P0455 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble
diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-575.)
I Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level
surface.
I Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.
NAEC0646S02
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving Pattern” on EC-67
before driving vehicle.
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving Pattern”, EC-67.
3) Stop vehicle.
4) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step.
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6) Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving Pattern”, EC-67.
EC-398
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
8)
9)
I
Stop vehicle.
Select “MODE 3” with GST.
If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-399.
I If P0440 or P1440 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, for DTC P0440, EC-357.
I If P1447 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P1447, EC-566.
I If P0455, P0440, P1440 and P1447 are not displayed on the
screen, go to the following step.
10) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0647
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
TF
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
PD
AX
SU
SEF915U
BR
OK or NG
ST
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
RS
2
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
BT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
I Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
I Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-399
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
4
CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
SEF427N
SEF943S
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
5
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-32.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair or reconnect the hose.
EC-400
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
©
7
MA
GO TO 7.
EM
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-377.
OK or NG
LC
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.
8
INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
FE
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF983Y
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
Models with CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 9.
Models without CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 10.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-401
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
EC-402
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF598U
3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.)
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF599U
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-403
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100.0%.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
SEF984Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 15.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
13
CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-26.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 14.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 15.
NG
©
Repair or reconnect the hose.
EC-404
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
14
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
GO TO 15.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-405
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF986Y
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF986Y
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
EC-406
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
16
GI
CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
MA
EM
LC
SEF961Y
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Install a vacuum pump to absolute pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 80 and engine ground under the following
conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF300XA
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (–700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg) or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
PD
AX
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 17.
NG
©
Replace absolute pressure sensor.
17
SU
BR
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun
as shown in the figure.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF974Y
SC
OK or NG
EL
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
IDX
EC-407
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
18
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m
(19.7in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 19.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
19
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-408
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH)
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0616
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side
is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes
depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF018S
On Board Diagnostic Logic
NAEC0617
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank
is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does
not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel
level sensor malfunction is detected.
Malfunction is detected when even though the vehicle is parked, a
signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM.
FE
CL
MT
Possible Cause
I
I
AT
NAEC0618
Fuel level sensor circuit
(The fuel level sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Fuel level sensor
TF
PD
AX
SU
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0619
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF195Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
ST
NAEC0619S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-411.
WITH GST
BR
NAEC0619S02
RS
BT
HA
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-409
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0620
MEC021D
EC-410
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
=NAEC0621
GI
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MA
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect fuel level sensor unit harness connector.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or a tester.
EM
LC
FE
SEF993Y
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
MT
AT
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M2, B1
I Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuel level sensor unit
©
3
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit terminal 2 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and fuel level sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 59 and fuel level
sensor unit terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-411
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M2, B1
I Harness connectors M94, F27
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor
©
6
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-128, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
7
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-412
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION
Component Description
Component Description
=NAEC0622
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side
is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes
depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF018S
On Board Diagnostic Logic
NAEC0623
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not
moving even after a long distance has been driven.
Malfunction is detected when the output signal of the fuel level
sensor does not change within the specified range even though the
vehicle has been driven a long distance.
FE
CL
MT
Possible Cause
I
I
AT
NAEC0624
Harness or connectors
(The level sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Fuel level sensor
TF
PD
AX
SU
Overall Function Check
NAEC0625
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level
sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
confirmed.
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the
handling of the fuel. Refer to FE-5, “Fuel Tank”.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining
fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF195Y
NAEC0625S01
NOTE:
Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel
cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in
advance.
1) Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2) Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to “Fuel Pressure
Release”, EC-39.
3) Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4) Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was
removed.
EC-413
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
5)
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds then
turn “ON”.
6) Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
7) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
8) Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
9) Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal,
6-5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
10) Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
11) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
12) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and confirm whether
the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 11.
If NG, check the fuel level sensor, refer to EL-128, “FUEL
LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK”.
WITH GST
SEF615X
NAEC0625S02
NOTE:
Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel
cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in
advance.
1) Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2) Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to “Fuel Pressure
Release”, EC-39.
3) Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4) Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was
removed.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
6) Set voltmeters probe between ECM terminal 83 (fuel level
sensor signal) and ground.
7) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
8) Check voltage between ECM terminal 83 and ground and note
it.
9) Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel
tank using proper equipment.
10) Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
11) Confirm that the voltage between ECM terminal 83 and ground
changes more than 0.03V during step 8 - 10.
If NG, check component of fuel level sensor, refer to EL-128,
“FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK”.
EC-414
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0626
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side
is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes
depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF018S
On Board Diagnostic Logic
NAEC0627
ECM receives two signals from the fuel level sensor circuit.
One is fuel level sensor power supply circuit, and the other is fuel
level sensor ground circuit.
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit
malfunction.
Malfunction is detected when an excessively low or high voltage is
sent from the sensor is sent to ECM.
FE
CL
MT
Possible Cause
I
I
AT
NAEC0628
Fuel level sensor circuit
(The fuel level sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Fuel level sensor
TF
PD
AX
SU
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0629
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch “ON”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0629S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-417.
WITH GST
HA
SC
EL
NAEC0629S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
IDX
SEF195Y
EC-415
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0630
MEC022D
EC-416
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
=NAEC0631
GI
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect fuel level sensor unit harness connector.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit terminal 3 and ground, ECM terminal 83 and ground with CONSULT-II or
tester.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF374Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
AT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M2, B1 and M94, F27
I Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuel level sensor unit
©
3
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit terminal 2 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
MT
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 59 and fuel level sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-417
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M2, B1
I Harness connectors M94, F27
I Harness for open between ECM and fuel level sensor
©
6
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness on connectors.
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-128, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
7
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-418
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Component Description
Component Description
=NAEC0242
The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a
pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the
speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM.
GI
MA
EM
LC
AEC110
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0669
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
FE
CL
DATA (DC Voltage)
MT
Approximately 2.5V
AT
[Engine is running]
I Jack up front wheels.
I In 1st gear position
I 10 km/h (6 MPH)
TF
SEF583X
86
W/L
Vehicle speed sensor
PD
Approximately 2.0V
AX
[Engine is running]
I Jack up front wheels.
I In 2nd gear position
I 30 km/h (19 MPH)
SU
SEF584X
BR
ST
RS
BT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0244
Malfunction is detected when the almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal
from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is
being driven.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-419
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0514
Harness or connector
(The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Vehicle speed sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0245
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted
in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected
to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
SEF196Y
3)
4)
5)
NAEC0245S01
Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”).
Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable
gear position.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-423.
If OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 1,800 rpm (A/T)
More than 2,000 rpm (M/T)
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
5.5 - 14.0 msec (A/T)
6.0 - 14.0 msec (M/T)
Selector lever
Suitable position
PW/ST SIGNAL
OFF
6)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-423.
EC-420
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Overall Function Check
Overall Function Check
NAEC0246
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle
speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0246S01
Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine.
Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “MODE 1” with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed
10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-423.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-421
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0247
MEC018D
EC-422
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
GI
CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 86 and combination meter terminal 13.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
NAEC0248
EM
LC
FE
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
©
MA
CL
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
MT
3
CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION
AT
Make sure that speedometer functions properly.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
TF
PD
4
CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M70, B50
I Harness for open or short between combination meter and vehicle speed sensor
I Harness for open or short between vehicle speed sensor and ECM
AX
SU
OK or NG
OK
©
Check combination meter and vehicle speed sensor. Refer to EL section.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5
BR
ST
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
RS
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-423
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Description
Description
NAEC0249
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch
Start signal
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Park/neutral position
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner operation
Power steering oil pressure switch
Power steering load signal
Battery
Battery voltage
Vehicle speed sensor
Vehicle speed
Ambient air temperature switch
Ambient air temperature
Intake air temperature sensor
Intake air temperature
Absolute pressure sensor
Ambient barometic pressure
NAEC0249S01
ECM function
Idle air
control
Actuator
IACV-AAC valve
This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified
level. Idle speed is controlled through fine adjustment of the
amount of air which by-passes the throttle valve via IACV-AAC
valve. The IACV-AAC valve changes the opening of the air by-pass
passage to control the amount of auxiliary air. This valve is actuated by a step motor built into the valve, which moves the valve in
the axial direction in steps corresponding to the ECM output signals. One step of IACV-AAC valve movement causes the respective opening of the air by-pass passage. (i.e. when the step
advances, the opening is enlarged.) The opening of the valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The
crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed
and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the step
position of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with
the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the
lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by takig into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warm up,
deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and
cooling fan operation).
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
IACV-AAC Valve
SEF765P
NAEC0249S02
NAEC0249S0201
The IACV-AAC valve is operated by a step motor for centralized
control of auxiliary air supply. This motor has four winding phases
and is actuated by the output signals of ECM which turns ON and
OFF two windings each in seqeunce. Each time the IACV-AAC
valve opens or closes to change tha auxiliary air quantity, the ECM
sends a pulse signal to the step motor. When no change in the
auxiliary air quantity is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse
signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains
at that particular opening.
EC-424
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
GI
NAEC0250
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
IACV-AAC/V
MA
CONDITION
I
I
I
I
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
14 - 20 step
2,000 rpm
—
EM
LC
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0670
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
6
7
8
17
WIRE
COLOR
PU/G
GY
Y
GY/L
ITEM
IACV-AAC valve
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
FE
CL
DATA (DC Voltage)
MT
0.1 - 14V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
AT
NAEC0252
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) the IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly,
(Malfunction B) the IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly.
TF
PD
AX
SU
Possible Cause
MALFUNCTION A
I
I
I
I
NAEC0515S01
Harness or connectors
(The IACV-AAC valve circuit is open.)
IACV-AAC valve
MALFUNCTION B
I
NAEC0515
ST
NAEC0515S02
Harness or connectors
(The IACV-AAC valve circuit is shorted.)
Air control valve (Power steering)
IACV-AAC valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
BR
RS
BT
NAEC0253
NOTE:
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B”.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-425
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NAEC0253S01
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch “ON”.
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
NAEC0253S0101
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning” (see EC-58).
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle.
Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm for three seconds, then let it
idle for three seconds.
Do not rev engine to more than 3,000 rpm.
9) Perform step 4 once more.
10) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-428.
With GST
NAEC0253S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NAEC0253S02
TESTING CONDITION:
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
I Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C
(14°F).
With CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
NAEC0253S0201
Open engine hood.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning (see EC-58).
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II
Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-428.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-426
NAEC0253S0202
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0254
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC966C
EC-427
IDX
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0255
CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
SEF994Y
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between IACV-AAC valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF343X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1
I Harness connectors M33, F22
I Harness for open or short between IACV-AAC valve and ECM relay
©
Repair harness or connectors.
EC-428
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and IACV-AAC valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MA
EM
LC
MTBL0354
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
FE
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
4
CL
MT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F101, F6
I Harness for open or short between IACV-AAC valve and ECM
©
AT
Repair harness connectors.
TF
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-I
PD
Reconnect ECM harness connector and IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to air control valve (Power steering) at intake air duct.
Start engine and let it idle.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF995Y
RS
Vacuum slightly exists or does not exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace air control valve (Power steering).
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-429
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-II
Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence when steering wheel is turned.
SEF995Y
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK VACUUM PORT
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to air control valve (Power steering) at vacuum port.
Blow air into vacuum port.
Check that air flows freely.
SEF996Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Repair or clean vacuum port.
EC-430
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
GI
CHECK VACUUM HOSES AND TUBES
1. Disconnect vacuum hoses between air control valve (Power steering) and vacuum port, air control valve (Power steering) and intake air duct.
2. Check the hoses and tubes for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Repair hoses or tubes.
9
CL
MT
CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE-I
AT
1. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between IACV-AAC valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF344XA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-431
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE-II
1. Reconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector and ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”, and ensure the IACV-AAC valve makes operating sound according to the ignition
switch position.
SEF997Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
GO TO 11.
11
REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE
1. Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
2. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-58.
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT
©
INSPECTION END
INCMP
©
Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
12
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors and vacuum hoses.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Also warm up transmission to normal operating temperature.
I For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
I For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
5. Stop vehicle with engine running.
6. Check target idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 13.
NG
©
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-58.
13
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-432
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0256
A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position
switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open
throttle position switch is used only for A/T control.
When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle
position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only
uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF505V
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0257
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CLSD THL/P SW
CONDITION
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
SPECIFICATION
Throttle valve: Idle position
ON
Throttle valve: Slightly open
OFF
CL
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
MT
NAEC0671
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
56
WIRE
COLOR
OR/L
ITEM
FE
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
Throttle position switch I Accelerator pedal fully released
(Closed position)
[Engine is running]
I Accelerator pedal depressed
DATA (DC Voltage)
AT
TF
PD
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
AX
Approximately 0V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
SU
NAEC0259
Malfunction is detected when battery voltage from the closed
throttle position switch is sent to ECM with the throttle valve
opened.
BR
ST
RS
BT
Possible Cause
I
I
I
Harness or connectors
(The closed throttle position switch circuit is shorted.)
Closed throttle position switch
Throttle position sensor
NAEC0516
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-433
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0260
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF197Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0260S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
start engine.
Select “CLSD THL/P SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
If “CLSD THL/P SW” is not available, go to step 5.
Check the signal under the following conditions.
Condition
SEF198Y
Signal indication
Throttle valve: Idle position
ON
Throttle valve: Slightly open
OFF
5)
6)
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-437.
If OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
THRTL POS SEN
More than 2.5V
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)
will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
7)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-437.
Overall Function Check
NAEC0261
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed
throttle position switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
SEF345X
NAEC0261S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check the voltage between ECM terminal 56 (Closed throttle
position switch signal) and ground under the following conditions.
At idle: Battery voltage
EC-434
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
3)
At 2,000 rpm: Approximately 0V
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-437.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-435
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
=NAEC0262
MEC967C
EC-436
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0263
GI
CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEF944Y
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between throttle position switch terminal 5 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF346X
PD
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
AX
SU
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and ECM
©
3
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 56 and throttle position switch terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-437
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK IGNITION TIMING AND ENGINE IDLE SPEED
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
MTBL0654
Models with CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 6.
Models without CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 6.
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener.
Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump and the throttle opener.
Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
8. Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following conditions.
Measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
MTBL0355
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 8.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
EC-438
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GI
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener.
Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump and the throttle opener.
Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF793W
6. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
7. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 6 and 5 under the following conditions.
Resistance measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF998Y
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 8.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-439
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
MTBL0653
Is it possible to adjust closed throttle position switch?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 9.
Yes (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 9.
No
©
Replace throttle position switch.
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
8. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditins.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
MTBL0230
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Replace throttle position sensor.
EC-440
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GI
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF348X
AX
OK or NG
SU
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Replace throttle position sensor.
BR
10
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
ST
INSPECTION END
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-441
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
System Description
System Description
NAEC0264
This circuit line (LAN) is used to control the smooth shifting up and down of A/T during the hard acceleration/
deceleration.
Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module).
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only in TCM but also ECM after the A/T
related repair.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0672
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
114
WIRE
COLOR
G/R
ITEM
CONDITION
Communication line
(LAN)
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2V
NAEC0266
Malfunction is detected when ECM receives incorrect voltage from
TCM (Transmission Control Module) continuously.
Possible Cause
I
I
I
NAEC0517
Harness or connectors
[The communication line circuit between ECM and TCM
(Transmission Control Module) is open or shorted.]
TCM
Dead (Weak) battery
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0267
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC-442
NAEC0267S01
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
2)
3)
4)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 2 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-445.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-443
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0269
MEC968C
EC-444
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0270
GI
CHECK A/T CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM (Transmission Control Module) harness connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEF955Y
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF001Z
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 114 and TCM terminal 33.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M94, F27
I Harness for open or short between ECM and TCM (Transmission control module)
3
BR
ST
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK A/T CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 114 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectos.
4
AX
SU
DETECT MALFUNCTION PART
©
PD
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
IDX
INSPECTION END
EC-445
DTC P0605 ECM
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0271
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine.
SEC220B
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0272
Malfunction is detected when ECM calculation function is
malfunctioning.
Possible Cause
I
NAEC0518
ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0273
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC0273S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 30 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-447.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-446
NAEC0273S02
DTC P0605 ECM
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0274
INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-446.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
1.
2.
3.
4.
With GST
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select MODE 4 with GST.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-446.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
1.
2.
3.
4.
MA
EM
LC
FE
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
INSPECTION END
2
GI
CL
MT
REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-75.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-58,
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT
©
INSPECTION END
INCMP
©
Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-447
DTC P1110 (RIGHT, -B1), P1135 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Description
Description
NAEC0691
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NAEC0691S01
Sensor
Input signal to ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed (POS)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Engine speed (REF)
Camshaft position sensor
Engine speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Vehicle speed sensor
Vehicle speed
ECM
Actuator
Intake valve
Intake valve timing control soletiming connoid valve
trol
JEF349Z
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the camshaft timing control valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase
engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0692
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V TIM (B2)
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
CONDITION
I Engine: After warming up
I Shift lever “N”
I Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
I No-load
I Engine: After warming up
I Shift lever “N”
I Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
I No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0° CA
2,000 rpm
Approximately 12 - 18° CA
Idle
0%
2,000 rpm
Approximately 40%
EC-448
DTC P1110 (RIGHT, -B1), P1135 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
=NAEC0693
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than the ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
GI
MA
EM
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
LC
Battery voltage
7 - 8V
13
OR/B
Intake valve timing
control solenoid valves
(RH)
FE
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
CL
SEF350Z
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Battery voltage
MT
AT
7 - 8V
15
P/L
Intake valve timing
control solenoid valves
(LH)
TF
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
PD
SEF350Z
AX
Approximately 0.5V
SU
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
79
Y/G
Intake valve timing
control position sensors (RH)
BR
SEF351Z
ST
Approximately 0.5V
RS
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
BT
SEF352Z
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-449
DTC P1110 (RIGHT, -B1), P1135 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 0.5V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
89
OR
SEF351Z
Intake valve timing
control position sensors (LH)
Approximately 0.5V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF352Z
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0694
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A)
The alignment of the intake valve timing control has been misregistered.
(Malfunction B)
There is a gap between angle of target and phase-control angle
degree.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC0694S01
When malfunction A or B is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe
mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Intake valve timing control
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function.
Possible Cause
MALFUNCTION A OR B
I
I
I
I
NAEC0695
NAEC0695S01
Harness or connectors
(Intake valve timing control position sensor circuit is open or
shorted.) Refer to EC-484.
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
EC-450
DTC P1110 (RIGHT, -B1), P1135 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0696
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
I If both DTC P1111 (B1), P1136 (B2) or P1140 (B1), P1145
(B2) and P1110 (B1), P1135 (B2) are displayed, perform
trouble diagnosis for “DTC P1111 (B1), P1136 (B2) or
P1140 (B1), P1145 (B2)” first. (See EC-453, EC-484.)
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
SEF353Z
More than 2,000 rpm
COOLANT TEMPS
More than 70°C (158°F)
Selector lever
1st positon (A/T or M/T)
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill
(Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for
this test.)
COOLANT TEMPS
More than 70°C (158°F)
Selector lever
“P” or “N” position
5)
FE
CL
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “P1140, P1145 INTAKE
VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR”. Refer to
EC-484.
With GST
LC
MT
Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive
seconds.
Idle
EM
NAEC0696S0101
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
MA
NAEC0696S01
ENG SPEED
4)
GI
NAEC0696S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
BR
ST
RS
BT
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0696S02
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 conecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
2,000 - 3,000 rpm (A constant rotation
is maintained.)
COOLANT TEMPS
70 - 90°C (158 - 194°F)
SEF353Z
EC-451
HA
NAEC0696S0201
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1110 (RIGHT, -B1), P1135 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
Selector lever
1st position (A/T or M/T)
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill
(Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for
this test.)
4)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “P1140, P1145 INTAKE
VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR”. Refer to
EC-484.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-452
NAEC0696S0202
DTC P1111 (RIGHT, -B1), P1136 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF354Z
NAEC0697
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
GI
MA
EM
LC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0698
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
CONDITION
I Engine: After warming up
I Shift lever “N”
I Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
I No-load
SPECIFICATION
CL
Idle
0%
2,000 rpm
Approximately 40%
MT
AT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0699
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than the ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
FE
TF
PD
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
AX
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Battery voltage
SU
7 - 8V
13
OR/B
Intake valve timing
control solenoid valves
(RH)
BR
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
ST
SEF350Z
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Battery voltage
RS
BT
7 - 8V
15
P/L
Intake valve timing
control solenoid valves
(LH)
HA
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SC
SEF350Z
EL
IDX
EC-453
DTC P1111 (RIGHT, -B1), P1136 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0700
Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage is sent to the
ECM through intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0701
Harness or connectors
(Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted)
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0702
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
SEF353Z
NAEC0702S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 seconds.
Engine speed
More than Idle speed
Selector lever
“P” or “N” position
4)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-457.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-454
NAEC0702S02
DTC P1111 (RIGHT, -B1), P1136 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
NAEC0703
GI
NAEC0703S01
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC989C
EC-455
IDX
DTC P1111 (RIGHT, -B1), P1136 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0703S02
MEC988C
EC-456
DTC P1111 (RIGHT, -B1), P1136 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
NAEC0704
GI
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
MA
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Perform “TARGET INT/V TIM” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Hold engine speed at 1,500 to 2,500 rpm under the following step.
Touch “UP” or “DOWN” on CONSULT-II screen.
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF355Z
5. Check the following.
I The angle of a corresponding INT/V TIM (B1)/(B2) to setting TARGET INT/V TIM confirms the variation.
MT
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
2. Reconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Supply intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals with battery voltage as shown below.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF356Z
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
GO TO 2.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-457
DTC P1111 (RIGHT, -B1), P1136 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF357Z
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF603X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
3
DETECT MALFUNCTION PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I 10A fuse
I Harness continuity between fuse and intake valve timing control solenoid valve
©
4
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness connectors continuity between ECM terminal 13 (Right) or 15 (Left) and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-458
DTC P1111 (RIGHT, -B1), P1136 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as follows.
MA
EM
LC
SEF358Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
6
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
FE
CL
MT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-459
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
Description
NAEC0523
If DTC P1130 is displayed with P1165, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1165, EC-495.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Ignition switch
Start signal
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
NAEC0523S01
ECM function
Actuator
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
Swirl control
" Vacuum signal
valve conSwirl control valve actuator
trol
"
Swirl control valve
This system has a swirl control valve in the intake passage of each
cylinder.
While idling and during low engine speed operation, the swirl control valve closes. Thus the velocity of the air in the intake passage
increases, promoting the vaporization of the fuel and producing a
swirl in the combustion chamber.
Because of this operation, this system tends to increase the burning speed of the gas mixture, improve fuel consumption, and
increase the stability in running conditions.
Also, except when idling and during low engine speed operation,
this system opens the swirl control valve. In this condition, this
system tends to increase power by improving intake efficiency via
reduction of intake flow resistance, intake flow.
The solenoid valve controls swirl control valve’s shut/open condition. This solenoid valve is operated by the ECM.
Throttle position sensor
(Idle position)
Engine speed
(A/T)
Engine speed
(M/T)
Swirl control
valve control
solenoid valve
Swirl control
valve
ON
Below 3,200
rpm
Below 2,400
rpm
ON
Closed
Less than
3,200 rpm
Less than
2,400 rpm
ON
Closed
More than
3,600 rpm
More than
2,800 rpm
OFF
Open
OFF
When engine coolant temperature is below 10°C (50°F) and above 55°C (131°F),
swirl control valve is kept open regardless of above condition.
SEF446Z
EC-460
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Swirl Control Valve Control Solenoid Valve
NAEC0523S02
GI
NAEC0523S0201
The swirl control valve control solenoid valve responds to signals
from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the
solenoid valve is bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the
swirl control valve actuator. This operation closes the swirl control
valve. When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the vacuum signal is
cut and the swirl control valve opens.
MA
EM
LC
SEF002Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0524
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
SWRL CONT S/V
CONDITION
I Engine speed: Idle
SPECIFICATION
CL
Engine coolant temperature is
between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C
(122°F).
ON
Engine coolant temperature is
above 55°C (131°F).
OFF
MT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
AT
NAEC0673
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
29
WIRE
COLOR
G
ITEM
FE
CONDITION
TF
PD
DATA (DC Voltage)
AX
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15 to
50°C (59 to 122°F).
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
I Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C
(131°F).
SU
0 - 1.0V
BR
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
ST
RS
BT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0526
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through
swirl control valve control solenoid valve,
(Malfunction B) The vacuum signal is not sent to swirl control
valve under specified driving conditions, even though swirl control
valve control solenoid valve is ON,
(Malfunction C) The vacuum signal is sent to swirl control valve
even though swirl control valve control solenoid valve is OFF.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-461
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
MALFUNCTION A
I
I
Harness or connectors
(The swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
MALFUNCTION B
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0527S02
Harness or connector
(The swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is open.)
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
Intake system
(Intake air leaks)
Hoses and tubes between intake manifold, vacuum tank and
swirl control valve actuator
Swirl control valve actuator
Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch
Mass air flow sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Throttle position sensor
MALFUNCTION C
I
NAEC0527
NAEC0527S01
NAEC0527S03
Harness or connector
(The swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is
shorted.)
Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Throttle position sensor
Hoses and tubes between air cleaner and swirl control valve
vacuum check switch
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0528
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If the 1st trip DTC
cannot be confirmed, perform “Procedure for malfunction B”.
If the 1st trip DTC is not confirmed on “Procedure for malfunction B”, perform “Procedure for malfunction C”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0528S01
NAEC0528S0101
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-465.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-462
NAEC0528S0102
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NAEC0528S02
TESTING CONDITION:
I For best results, perform the test at a temperature above
5°C (41°F).
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle, then stop engine
immediately.
With CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC0528S0201
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Confirm COOLAN TEMP/S value is 40°C (104°F) or less.
If the value is more than 40°C (104°F), park the vehicle in a
cool place and retry from step 1.
Start engine and wait until COOLAN TEMP/S value increases
to more than 55°C (131°F).
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-465.
With GST
With CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
4)
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
NAEC0528S0301
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip
DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-465.
With GST
EM
NAEC0528S03
TESTING CONDITION:
I For best results, perform the test at a temperature above
5°C (41°F).
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1)
2)
3)
MA
NAEC0528S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
GI
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
NAEC0528S0302
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-463
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0529
MEC980C
EC-464
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
PROCEDURE A
1
NAEC0530
GI
NAEC0530S01
MA
INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
EM
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
GO TO 3.
2
LC
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF003Z
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-465
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF002Z
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse
©
5
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
EC-466
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
GI
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
Start engine and let it idle.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Select “SWIRL CONT SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF004Z
MT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF005Z
BR
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
ST
RS
7
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-467
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE B
1
NAEC0530S02
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Check intake air system for air leaks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair intake system.
2
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF003Z
3. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
EC-468
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF002Z
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
4
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SU
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse
©
5
PD
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
OK or NG
SC
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
EL
IDX
EC-469
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK HOSES
Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold, and swirl control valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection
or disconnection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Repair hoses or tubes.
EC-470
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
GI
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
Start engine and let it idle.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF004Z
MT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF005Z
BR
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-471
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE ACTUATOR
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect vacuum hose between swirl control valve actuator and swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
Start engine and let it idle.
Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
Make sure that swirl control valve actuator rod moves according to “SWIRL CONT SOL/V indication.
SEF006Z
1.
2.
3.
4.
Without CONSULT-II
Reconnect vacuum hose between swirl control valve actuator and swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
Make sure that swirl control valve actuator rod moves according to 12V direct current being applied.
SEF006Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Replace swirl control valve and actuator.
EC-472
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
Attach vacuum pump to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 55 and ground under the following conditions.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF709X
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Replace swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
10
MT
AT
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAFS harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
BR
ST
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Replace mass air flow sensor.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-473
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
8. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
SEF062Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
EC-474
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GI
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
MT
AT
TF
MTBL0231
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
13
PD
AX
SU
ADJUST CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
BR
ST
RS
MTBL0653
BT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-475
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
14
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen the fixing bolts and remove the CKPS (REF).
3. Visually check the CKPS (REF) for chipping.
SEF585P
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 15.
NG
©
Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
15
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)-II
Check resistance between CKPS (REF) terminals 1 and 2.
SEF350X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
16
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
PROCEDURE C
1
INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
GO TO 3.
EC-476
NAEC0530S03
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF003Z
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
3
MT
AT
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF002Z
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-477
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse
©
5
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
6
CHECK HOSES
Check hoses and tubes between air cleaner and swirl control valve vacuum check switch for clogging or improper connection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Repair hoses or tubes.
EC-478
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
GI
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
Start engine and let it idle.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF004Z
MT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF005Z
BR
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-479
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
Attach vacuum pump to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 55 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF709X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Replace swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
9
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen the fixing bolts and remove the CKPS (REF).
3. Visually check the CKPS (REF) for chipping.
SEF585P
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
EC-480
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)-II
Check resistance between CKPS (REF) terminals 1 and 2.
MA
EM
LC
SEF350X
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-481
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
8. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
SEF062Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
EC-482
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GI
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
MT
AT
TF
MTBL0231
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
13
PD
AX
SU
ADJUST CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
BR
ST
RS
MTBL0653
BT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
14
HA
SC
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EL
IDX
EC-483
DTC P1140 (RIGHT, -B1), P1145 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
POSITION SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0705
Intake valve advance unit position sensors are located in the front
cylinder heads in both right/left banks.
This sensor uses a Hall IC (element).
The cam position is determined by the intake primary cam sprocket
concave (in three places). The ECM provides feedback to the
intake valve timing control for appropriate target valve open-close
timing according to drive conditions based on detected cam position.
SEF359Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0706
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V TIM (B2)
CONDITION
I Engine: After warming up
I Shift lever “N”
I Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
I No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0° CA
2,000 rpm
Approximately 12 - 18° CA
EC-484
DTC P1140 (RIGHT, -B1), P1145 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
POSITION SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
=NAEC0707
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than the ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
LC
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Y/G
MA
EM
ITEM
Approximately 0.5V
79
GI
Intake valve timing
control position sensors (RH)
FE
SEF351Z
Approximately 0.5V
CL
MT
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
AT
SEF352Z
TF
Approximately 0.5V
PD
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
89
OR
AX
SEF351Z
Intake valve timing
control position sensors (LH)
SU
Approximately 0.5V
BR
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
ST
SEF352Z
RS
BT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0708
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high or low voltage
from the sensor is sent to ECM.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-485
DTC P1140 (RIGHT, -B1), P1145 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
POSITION SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0709
Harness or connectors
(Intake valve timing control position sensor circuit is open or
shorted)
Intake valve timing control position sensor.
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0710
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
SEF353Z
NAEC0710S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 seconds.
Engine speed
More than Idle speed
Selector lever
“P” or “N” position
4)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-489.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-486
NAEC0710S02
DTC P1140 (RIGHT, -B1), P1145 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
POSITION SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
RIGHT BANK
NAEC0711
GI
NAEC0711S01
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC987C
EC-487
IDX
DTC P1140 (RIGHT, -B1), P1145 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
POSITION SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK
NAEC0711S02
MEC986C
EC-488
DTC P1140 (RIGHT, -B1), P1145 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
POSITION SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0712
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
©
2
CL
GO TO 2.
MT
CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor harness connector.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF360Z
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between intake valve timing control position sensor harness connector terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF370X
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
HA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-489
DTC P1140 (RIGHT, -B1), P1145 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
POSITION SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Harness connectors E1, M1
I Harness for open or short between ECM and intake valve timing control position sensor
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and intake valve timing control position sensor
©
4
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness connector continuity between intake valve timing control position sensor harness connector terminal 1
and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5
CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness connectors continuity between ECM terminal 79 (Right) or 89 (Left) and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6
CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR INSTALLATION
Check that intake valve timing control position sensor is installed correctly as shown below.
SEF361Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Install intake valve timing control position sensor correclty.
EC-490
DTC P1140 (RIGHT, -B1), P1145 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
POSITION SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK IMPROPER INSTALLATION
1. Loosen and retighten the fixing bolt of the intake valve timing control position sensor.
2. Reconnect harness connector disconnected.
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-486 again.
MA
Is a 1st trip DTC P1140 (RIGHT, -B1) P1145 (LEFT, -B2) detected?
Yes
©
GO TO 8.
No
©
INSPECTION END
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
EM
LC
CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector.
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF362Z
TF
OK or NG
PD
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Replace intake valve timing control position sensor.
AX
9
CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR-II
I Check resistance as shown below.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF363Z
BT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Replace intake valve timing control position sensor.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-491
DTC P1140 (RIGHT, -B1), P1145 (LEFT, -B2) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
POSITION SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
CHECK CAMSHAFT
Check accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft.
Refer to step 35 of “Timing chain removal”, EM-23.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
Remove debris and clean the signal pick-up cut out of camshaft.
11
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-492
DTC P1148 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P1168 (LEFT BANK, -B2) CLOSED LOOP
CONTROL
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0282
★ The closed loop control has the one trip detection logic.
Malfunction is detected when the closed loop control function for
right bank does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the
specified condition, the closed loop control function for left bank
does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified
condition.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Possible Cause
I
I
I
NAEC0531
The front heated oxygen sensor circuit is open or shorted.
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
FE
CL
MT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
AT
NAEC0283
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm during the
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”. If the engine speed limit is
exceeded, retry the procedure from step 2.
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
I
I
SEF063Y
NAEC0283S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm and check one of the following.
“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage should go above 0.70V at least
once.
“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage should go below 0.21V at least
once.
If the check result is NG, perform “Diagnosis Procedure”,
EC-494.
EC-493
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1148 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P1168 (LEFT BANK, -B2) CLOSED LOOP
CONTROL
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
4)
5)
If the check result is OK, perform the following step.
Let engine idle at least 5 minutes.
Maintain the following condition at least 50 consecutive seconds.
B/FUEL SCHDL
3.6 msec or more (A/T)
3.0 msec or more (M/T)
ENG SPEED
1,500 rpm or more
Selector lever
Suitable position
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 70 km/h (43 MPH)
6)
During this test, P0130 and/or P0150 may be displayed on
CONSULT-II screen.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-494.
Overall Function Check
NAEC0284
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed loop
control. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEF308XB
I
I
4)
NAEC0284S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) right bank signal] or 62 [Heated oxygen
sensor 1 (front) left bank signal] and engine ground.
Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no-load.
The voltage should go above 0.70V at least once.
The voltage should go below 0.21V at least once.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-494.
Diagnostic Procedure
NAEC0285
Perform trouble diagnosis for “DTC P0133, P0153”, EC-220.
EC-494
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0532
The swirl control valve control vacuum check switch detects
vacuum signal to the swirl control valve, and sends “ON” or “OFF”
signal to the ECM.
When vacuum is supplied to the valve, the swirl control valve control vacuum check switch sends “OFF” signal to the ECM.
The swirl control valve control vacuum check switch is not used to
control the engine system, it is used for on board diagnosis.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF999Y
FE
CL
MT
SEF446Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0533
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
SWL CON VC SW
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
AX
ON
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
SU
NAEC0674
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
55
TF
PD
I Engine speed: Idle
OFF
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C (122°F).
I Engine speed: Idle
I Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C (131°F).
AT
BR
ST
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
RS
W/B
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15 to
Swirl control valve con50°C (59 to 122°F).
trol vacuum check
[Engine is running]
switch
I Idle speed
I Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C
(131°F).
Approximately 5V
BT
HA
0 - 1.0V
SC
EL
IDX
EC-495
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0535
Malfunction is detected when the swirl control valve control vacuum
check switch remains “OFF” under specified engine conditions.
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
NAEC0536
Harness or connectors
(Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch circuit is
open.)
Hoses
(Hoses are clogged or connected incorrectly.)
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0537
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
For best results, perform the test at a temperature above 5°C
(41°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0537S01
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II and wait at
least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-498.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-496
NAEC0537S02
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0538
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC981C
EC-497
IDX
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0539
CHECK HOSES
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check hose for clogging or improper connection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Repair or reconnect the hose.
2
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Disconnect swirl control valve control vacuum check switch harness connector.
SEF999Y
2. Check harness continuity between terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1 and M92, F27
I Harness for open between swirl control valve control vacuum check switch and engine ground
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness connectors.
EC-498
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 55 and swirl control valve control vacuum check switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
GI
MA
EM
OK or NG
LC
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
5
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
Attach vacuum pump to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 55 and ground under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF709X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-499
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
Start engine and let it idle.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF004Z
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals and 2.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF005Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
7
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-500
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0286
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
GI
NAEC0286S01
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF975Y
CL
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0675
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
MT
AT
DATA (DC Voltage)
TF
0 - 0.2V★
PD
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
21
22
23
30
31
32
Y/R
G/R
L/R
GY
PU/W
GY/R
Ignition
Ignition
Ignition
Ignition
Ignition
Ignition
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
AX
SEF399T
SU
0.1 - 0.3V★
BR
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
ST
SEF645T
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
RS
BT
NAEC0288
Malfunction is detected when the ignition signal in the primary circuit is not sent to ECM during engine cranking or running.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-501
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0572
Harness or connectors (The ignition primary circuit is open or
shorted.)
Power transistor unit built into ignition coil
Condenser
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0289
NOTE:
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I If DTC P1320 is displayed with DTC P0335, P0340, P1335
or P1336, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335,
P0340, P1335 or P1336 first. Refer to EC-336, EC-344,
EC-512 or EC-519.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0289S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to
“START” for at least 5 seconds.)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-506.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-502
NAEC0289S02
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0290
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC969C
EC-503
IDX
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
MEC970C
EC-504
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC971C
IDX
EC-505
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0291
CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 12.
No
©
GO TO 3.
2
SEARCH FOR MALFUNCTIONING CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Search for circuit which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop.
SEF190Y
©
3
GO TO 12.
CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF366X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Go to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY, EC-144.
EC-506
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF008Z
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF367X
PD
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
AX
CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
SU
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM relay.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF009Z
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 3 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 6.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-507
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1 and M33, F22
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and condenser
©
7
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF010Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
8
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open and short between ECM relay and fuse
©
9
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
CHECK ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between ECM relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
SEF296X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 17.
NG
©
Replace ECM relay.
EC-508
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
11
LC
CHECK CONDENSER
Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF369X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Replace condenser.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-509
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
SEF975Y
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF370X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
13
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F22.
©
14
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 15.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-510
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
GI
CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 30, 31, 32 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
16
LC
CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Check resistance between ignition coil terminals 2 and 3.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF371X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 17.
NG
©
Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
17
TF
PD
AX
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
SU
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-511
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF253P
NAEC0573
The crankshaft position sensor (REF) is located on the oil pan
(upper) facing the crankshaft pulley. It detects the TDC (Top Dead
Center) signal (120° signal).
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the
crankshaft pulley will periodically change. Permeability near the
sensor also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the TDC signal
(120° signal).
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0574
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CKPS·RPM (POS)
ENG SPEED
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Tachometer: Connect
Almost the same speed as the
I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II value.
value.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0676
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.3V★
(AC voltage)
65
75
LG
LG
Crankshaft position
sensor (REF)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SEF581X
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-512
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0576
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) 120° signal is not entered to ECM for the first few
seconds during engine cranking,
(Malfunction B) 120° signal is not entered to ECM during engine
running,
(Malfunction C) 120° signal cycle excessively changes during
engine running.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC0576S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates.
Detected items
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
circuit
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Compression TDC signal (120° signal) is controlled by camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
signal and crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal. Ignition timing will be delayed 0° to 2°.
FE
CL
MT
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
AT
NAEC0577
Harness or connectors
(The crankshaft position sensor (REF) circuit is open or
shorted.)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Starter motor (Refer to SC section.)
Starting system circuit (Refer to SC section.)
Dead (Weak) battery
TF
PD
AX
SU
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0578
NOTE:
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C”.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0578S01
With GST
SEF013Y
EC-513
ST
RS
BT
HA
NAEC0578S0101
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-516.
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
BR
SC
EL
NAEC0578S0102
IDX
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0578S02
NAEC0578S0201
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-516.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-514
NAEC0578S0202
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0579
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC960C
EC-515
IDX
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0580
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
©
2
GO TO 2.
CHECK CKPS (REF) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect CKPS (REF) harness connector.
SEF011Z
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 65, 75 and CKPS (REF) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E132, E135
I Harness connectors E116, M114 and M32, F23
I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (REF) and ECM
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-516
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK CKPS (REF) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (REF) terminal 1 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
LC
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E132, E135
I Harness connectors E116, M114 and M32, F23
I Harness for open between crankshaft position sensor (REF) and engine ground
©
6
FE
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
CL
CHECK CKPS (REF)-I
MT
1. Loosen the fixing bolts and remove the CKPS (REF).
2. Visually check the CKPS (REF) for chipping.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF585P
SU
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
7
BR
ST
CHECK CKPS (REF)-II
Check resistance between CKPS (REF) terminals 1 and 2.
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF350X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
EC-517
EL
IDX
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
CHECK CKPS (REF) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect harness connectors E132, E135.
3. Check harness continuity between harness connector E135 terminal 7 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
GO TO 9.
9
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E132, E135
I Harness connectors E116, M114 and M32, F23
I Harness for open between harness connector F23 and engine ground
©
10
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-518
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF977Y
NAEC0292
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan
facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects
the crankshaft position signal (1° signal).
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the gear
teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor
also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft
position signal (1° signal).
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0581
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CKPS·RPM (POS)
ENG SPEED
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Tachometer: Connect
Almost the same speed as the
I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II value.
value.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-519
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
=NAEC0677
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.4V
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
SEF057V
85
Y
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS)
Approximately 2.3V
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF058V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0294
Malfunction is detected when chipping of the signal plate (flywheel
or drive plate) gear tooth (cog) is detected by the ECM.
Possible Cause
I
I
I
Harness or connectors
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Signal plate (Drive plate/Flywheel)
EC-520
NAEC0582
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0295
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V.
GI
MA
EM
LC
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0295S01
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 70 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-523.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
FE
CL
NAEC0295S02
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-521
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0296
MEC959C
EC-522
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0297
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCERWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
©
2
CL
GO TO 2.
MT
CHECK CKPS (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect harness connectors E132, E135.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF978Y
2. Check voltage between harness connector E135 terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF979Y
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
BT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-523
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E132, E135
I Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
©
4
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK CKPS (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between harness connector E135 terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E132, E135
I Harness connectors E116, M114
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Harness for open between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
©
6
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK CKPS (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 85 and harness connector F23 terminal 16. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E132, E135
I Harness connectors E116, M114
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-524
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
GI
CHECK CKPS (POS) SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect CKPS (POS) harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF980Y
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (POS) terminals and harness connector E132 terminals as follows.
FE
CL
MTBL0531
MT
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9
AT
TF
PD
CHECK IMPROPER INSTALLATION
1. Loosen and retighten the fixing bolt of the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-521 again.
AX
Is a 1st trip DTC P1336 detected?
Yes
©
GO TO 10.
No
©
INSPECTION END
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-525
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
SEF981Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
11
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 85 and ground by briefly touching the sensor core with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SEF343Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
12
CHECK CKPS (POS) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect harness connectors E132, E135.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector E135 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 13.
EC-526
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
13
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E132, E135
I Harness connectors E116, M114
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Harness for open between harness connector E135 and engine ground
©
14
MA
EM
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
LC
CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate (flywheel or drive plate) gear tooth (cog).
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 15.
NG
©
Replace the signal plate (flywheel or drive plate).
15
FE
CL
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
MT
INSPECTION END
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-527
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0316
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between
the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve using intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak diagnosis.
If the ECM judges a leak equivalent to a very small leak, the very
small leak DTC P1441 will be detected. If the ECM judges a leak
equivalent to a small leak, the EVAP small leak DTC P0440 will be
detected. Correspondingly, if the ECM judges there is no leak, the
diagnosis result is OK.
SEF373Z
Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system has a very
small leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly.
CAUTION:
I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may
come on.
I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on.
I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0587
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve.
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
EC-528
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure
sensor
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
Absolute pressure sensor
Fuel tank temperature sensor
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged.
Water separator
EVAP canister is saturated with water.
Fuel level sensor and the circuit
EVAP control system pressure sensor
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
SEF881X
SEF882X
SEF883X
AT
NAEC0317
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC confirmation procedure.
NOTE:
I If DTC P1441 is displayed with P0440, perform TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1441 first.
I If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn
ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before
conducting the next test.
I After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are
installed properly.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
I If any of following condition is met just before the DTC
confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1
hour.
a) Fuel filler cap is removed.
b) Refilled or drained the fuel.
c) EVAP component parts is/are removed.
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 1.08 - 0.2V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool
EC-529
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the
range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then
start from step 1).
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5) Select “EVAP VERY/SML LEAK P1441” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII.
Follow the instruction displayed.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-531.
NOTE:
I If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range
displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic
inspection”, EC-102.
I Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
NAEC0317S05
With GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very
small leak function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
confirmed.
SEF462UA
CAUTION:
I Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the
EVAP system.
I Do not start engine.
I Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi).
1) Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP
service port.
2) Set the pressure pump and a hose.
3) Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5) Connect GST and select mode 8.
6) Using mode 8 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close) and vacuum cut valve bypass valve (open).
7) Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are
satisfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3
mmHg, 0.12 inHg)
If NG, go to diagnostic procedure, EC-531.
EC-530
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST instruction manual.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0643
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
FE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
CL
MT
AT
SEF915U
TF
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
PD
AX
2
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
SU
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
I Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
I Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
BR
ST
3
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
RS
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-531
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
SEF427N
SEF943S
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
EC-532
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
MA
EM
LC
SEF983Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
Models with CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 6.
Models without CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 7.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-533
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
EC-534
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF598U
3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.)
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF599U
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-535
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Replace water separator.
9
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-377.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.
10
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
SEF596U
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 14.
EC-536
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
MA
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 13.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
GO TO 12.
12
EM
LC
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
©
13
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FE
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
CL
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
MT
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100.0%.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF984Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
GO TO 15.
14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ST
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 17.
NG
©
GO TO 15.
BR
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-537
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-26.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 16.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 17.
NG
©
Repair or reconnect the hose.
16
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
GO TO 17.
EC-538
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
17
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
SEF986Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF334X
TF
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF986Y
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-539
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
18
CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
SEF961Y
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Install a vacuum pump to absolute pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 80 and engine ground under the following
conditions.
SEF300XA
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (–700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg) or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 19.
NG
©
Replace absolute pressure sensor.
19
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 1 and 2 by heating with hot water or heat gun
as shown in the figure.
SEF974Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 20.
NG
©
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
EC-540
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
20
GI
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m
(19.7in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 21.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
21
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-32.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 22.
NG
©
Repair or reconnect the hose.
22
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
©
GO TO 23.
EL
IDX
EC-541
DTC P1441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (VERY SMALL LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
23
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-128, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 24.
NG
©
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
24
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-542
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
Description
NAEC0319
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch
Start signal
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Throttle position switch
Closed throttle position
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Vehicle speed sensor
Vehicle speed
GI
NAEC0319S01
ECM
function
MA
Actuator
EM
LC
EVAP canEVAP canister purge volume
ister purge
control solenoid valve
flow control
FE
CL
MT
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow
rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the
flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the
air flow changes.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAEC0319S02
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF337U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
HA
CONDITION
SC
NAEC0320
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PURG VOL C/V
I
I
I
I
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle (Vehicle stopped)
0%
2,000 rpm
—
EL
IDX
EC-543
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0678
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
1
L/Y
SEF994U
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100
seconds after starting engine).
SEF995U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0322
Malfunction is detected when the canister purge flow is detected
during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed.
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0588
EVAP control system pressure sensor
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (The valve
is stuck open.)
EVAP canister vent control valve
EVAP canister
Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.)
EC-544
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0323
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 0°C (32°F) or more.
GI
MA
EM
LC
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
SEF205Y
7)
WITH GST
SEF206Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC0323S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II
changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take for approximately 10
seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-547.
NAEC0323S02
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds.
Select “MODE 7” with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-547.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF237Y
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-545
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0324
MEC962C
EC-546
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0325
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEF986Y
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF333X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
SU
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse
©
3
AX
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 1 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-547
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
SEF495R
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair it.
5
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
EC-548
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m
(19.7in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 7.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-549
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
8
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
EC-550
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
GI
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
MA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
10
EM
LC
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
FE
CL
MT
SEF337X
AT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-551
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 13.
NG
©
GO TO 12.
12
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform procedure 9 again.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 13.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
EC-552
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
13
GI
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
MA
EM
LC
SEF596U
FE
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 14.
No
©
GO TO 17.
CL
MT
14
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
AT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
GO TO 15.
TF
PD
15
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separater for clogging or poor connection
©
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-553
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
16
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 17.
NG
©
Clean or replace water separator.
17
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-554
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF032W
NAEC0326
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other
evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF143S
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0327
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VENT CONT/V
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Ignition switch: ON
NAEC0679
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
40
WIRE
COLOR
G/Y
TF
PD
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
AT
AX
SU
BR
ITEM
EVAP canister vent
control valve
CONDITION
[Ignition switch “ON”]
DATA (DC Voltage)
ST
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
RS
BT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0329
Malfunction is detected when EVAP canister vent control valve
remains closed under specified driving conditions.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-555
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0589
EVAP canister vent control valve
EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit
Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve
Water separator
EVAP canister is saturated with water.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0330
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF201Y
NAEC0330S01
1)
2)
3)
4)
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle at a speed of approximately 80 km/h (50 MPH)
for a maximum of 15 minutes.
NOTE:
If a malfunction exists, NG result may be displayed quicker.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-558.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-556
NAEC0330S02
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0331
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC963C
EC-557
IDX
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0332
CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
SEF143S
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Clean or replace water separator.
EC-558
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
GI
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
MA
3
EM
LC
SEF337X
FE
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
4
CL
MT
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF991Y
BR
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF339X
SC
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
EL
IDX
EC-559
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform the procedure 4 again.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
6
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
SEF596U
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 7.
No
©
GO TO 9.
7
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
8
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
©
9
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Repair it.
EC-560
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF495R
FE
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-561
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
12
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-562
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
System Description
System Description
NAEC0333
NOTE:
If DTC P1447 is displayed with P0510, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0510 first. (See EC-433.)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF373Z
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0334
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not,
a fault is determined.
Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor.
BR
ST
RS
BT
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0590
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck
closed
EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit
Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube
Blocked rubber tube
Cracked EVAP canister
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit
Closed throttle position switch
Blocked purge port
EC-563
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
I
EVAP canister vent control valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0335
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF207Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
SEF208Y
Selector lever
Suitable position
Vehicle speed
32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)
ENG SPEED
500 - 3,000 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.0 - 10 msec
Engine coolant temperature
More than 70°C (158°F)
7)
SEF238Y
NAEC0335S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
Select “PURG FLOW P1447” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in
“DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take at least 35 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-566.
EC-564
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Overall Function Check
Overall Function Check
NAEC0336
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
SEF355X
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
NAEC0336S01
Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds.
Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 84 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and ground.
Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle
speed and note it.
Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch
ON
Steering wheel
Fully turned
Headlamp switch
ON
Rear window defogger switch
ON
Engine speed
Approx. 3,000 rpm
Gear position
Any position other than “P”, “N” or “R”
8)
9)
Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays
0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for
at least 1 second.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-566.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-565
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
=NAEC0337
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister.
2
CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and
install vacuum gauge.
SEF983Y
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and let it idle.
Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
SEF012Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
EC-566
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK PURGE FLOW
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and
install vacuum gauge.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF983Y
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let idle.
Vacuum should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
4
CL
MT
AT
TF
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
PD
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
AX
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair it.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-567
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT
1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B.
SEF367U
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C.
3. Check that air flows freely.
SEF368U
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
6
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
EC-568
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF335X
PD
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8
AX
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
SU
BR
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Repair it.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-569
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
SEF495R
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure” for DTC P0450, EC-384.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
11
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
12
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF337X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 13.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
EC-570
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
13
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 15.
NG
©
GO TO 14.
14
AX
SU
BR
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 13 again.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
©
GO TO 16.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
©
GO TO 16.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-571
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
With CONSULT-II
Install all removed parts.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener.
Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump and the throttle opener.
Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.
SEF793W
7. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
8. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following conditions.
Measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
MTBL0355
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
GO TO 17.
EC-572
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
16
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
GI
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Install all removed parts.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener.
Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump and the throttle opener.
Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF793W
7. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
8. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 6 and 5 under the following conditions.
Resistance measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF998Y
SU
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 18.
NG
©
GO TO 17.
17
BR
ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
ST
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-102.
RS
BT
HA
MTBL0537
Is it possible to adjust closed throttle position switch?
SC
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 18.
No
©
Replace throttle position switch.
EL
IDX
EC-573
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
18
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 19.
NG
©
Replace it.
19
CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
©
20
GO TO 20.
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-574
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Component Description
Component Description
SEF032W
NAEC0338
NOTE:
If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other
evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF143S
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0339
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VENT CONT/V
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Ignition switch: ON
NAEC0680
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
40
WIRE
COLOR
Y
TF
PD
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
AT
AX
SU
BR
ITEM
EVAP canister vent
control valve
CONDITION
[Ignition switch “ON”]
DATA (DC Voltage)
ST
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
RS
BT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0341
Malfunction is detected when EVAP canister vent control valve
remains opened under specified driving conditions.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-575
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Possible Cause
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0591
EVAP canister vent control valve
EVAP control system pressure sensor and circuit
Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve
Water separator
EVAP canister is saturated with water.
Vacuum cut valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0342
NOTE:
I If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440 or P1440, perform
trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF565X
COOLAN TEMP/S
0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE
0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5)
SEF566X
SEF567X
NAEC0342S01
TESTING CONDITION:
I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level
surface.
I Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-102.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, go to the following step.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
7) Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds, then turn “ON”.
8) Disconnect hose from water separator.
9) Select “VENT CONTROL/V” of “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
10) Touch “ON” and “OFF” alternately.
EC-576
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
11) Make sure the following.
Condition
VENT CONTROL/V
GI
Air passage continuity
between A and B
ON
No
OFF
Yes
MA
EM
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-579.
If the result is OK, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0440, EC-357.
LC
SEF013Z
Overall Function Check
NAEC0343
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP canister vent control valve circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0343S01
Disconnect hose from water separator.
Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
Verify the following.
AEC783A
Condition
Air passage continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
No
No supply
Yes
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-579.
If the result is OK, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0440, EC-357.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-577
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0344
MEC963C
EC-578
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0345
GI
CHECK RUBBER TUBE
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
EM
LC
FE
SEF143S
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
2
MT
AT
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF337X
BR
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-579
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
4
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 3 again.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
EC-580
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove vacuum cut valve.
3. Check vacuum cut valve as follows:
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF379Q
a. Plug port C and D with fingers.
b. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
c. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
d. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
e. Open port C and D.
f. Blow air in port A check that air flows freely out of port C.
g. Blow air in port B check that air flows freely out of port D.
CL
MT
AT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace vacuum cut valve.
6
TF
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
PD
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF596U
RS
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 7.
No
©
GO TO 9.
7
BT
HA
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
SC
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
GO TO 8.
EL
IDX
EC-581
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
©
9
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Repair it.
10
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
SEF495R
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
EC-582
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
GI
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
12
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-583
DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL)
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0632
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side
is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes
depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
SEF018S
On Board Diagnostic Logic
NAEC0633
ECM receives two signals from the fuel level sensor.
One is fuel level sensor power supply circuit, and the other is fuel
level sensor ground circuit.
This diagnosis indicates the latter to detect open circuit malfunction. Malfunction is detected when a high voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
I
NAEC0634
Fuel level sensor circuit
(The fuel level sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0635
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0635S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-586.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF195Y
EC-584
NAEC0635S02
DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0640
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC023D
EC-585
IDX
DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 59 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Check the following.
I Harness connectors F27, M94
I Harness connectors M2, B1
I Harness for open between ECM and body ground
©
3
Replace open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-128, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
4
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
EC-586
=NAEC0641
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Description
Description
=NAEC0346
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
SEF485T
GI
NAEC0346S01
The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are
installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank
and the EVAP canister.
The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from
being applied to the fuel tank.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and
generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the
ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is
opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake
manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NAEC0346S02
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF373Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0347
SU
BR
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VC/V BYPASS/V
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Ignition switch: ON
ST
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
RS
NAEC0681
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
39
WIRE
COLOR
G/W
ITEM
CONDITION
BT
HA
DATA (DC Voltage)
SC
Vacuum cut valve
bypass valve
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EL
IDX
EC-587
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0349
Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0592
Harness or connectors
(The vacuum cut valve bypass valve circuit is open or shorted.)
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0350
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle speed.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0350S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-590.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-588
NAEC0350S02
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0351
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC972C
EC-589
IDX
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0352
INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
GO TO 3.
2
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
2. Select “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF014Z
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
EC-590
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALUE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass valve harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF485T
FE
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between vacuum cut valve bypass valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF015Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
4
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SU
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M2, B1
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
I Harness connectors B43, B101 and B151, B152
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between vacuum cut valve bypass valve and fuse
©
PD
BR
ST
Repair harness or connectors.
RS
5
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 39 and vacuum cut valve bypass valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 6.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-591
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B152, B151 and B101, B43
I Harness connectors B1, M2 and M94, F27
I Harness for open or short between vacuum cut valve bypass valve and ECM
©
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect harness disconnected connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF016Z
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF358X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
8
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-592
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Description
Description
NAEC0353
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
SEF485T
GI
NAEC0353S01
The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are
installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank
and the EVAP canister.
The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from
being applied to the fuel tank.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and
generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the
ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is
opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake
manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NAEC0353S02
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF373Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0354
SU
BR
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VC/V BYPASS/V
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Ignition switch: ON
ST
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
RS
NAEC0682
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
39
WIRE
COLOR
G/W
ITEM
CONDITION
BT
HA
DATA (DC Voltage)
SC
Vacuum cut valve
bypass valve
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EL
IDX
EC-593
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0356
Malfunction is detected when vacuum cut valve bypass valve does
not operate properly.
Possible Cause
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NAEC0593
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
Vacuum cut valve
Bypass hoses for clogging
EVAP control system pressure sensor and circuit
EVAP canister vent control valve
Hose between fuel tank and vacuum cut valve clogged
Hose between vacuum cut valve and EVAP canister clogged
EVAP canister
EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0357
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
For best results, perform test at a temperature of 5 to 30°C (41
to 86°F).
SEF210Y
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
SEF211Y
NAEC0357S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
Select “VC CUT/V BP/V P1491” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM”
in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take at least 30 seconds.)
ENG SPEED
Idle speed or more
Selector lever
Suitable position
Vehicle speed
37 km/h (23 MPH) or more
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.3 - 10 msec
8)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 3.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
SEF239Y
EC-594
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-597.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Overall Function Check
NAEC0358
Use this procedure to check the overall function of vacuum cut
valve bypass valve. During this check, the 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
NAEC0358S01
Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve
as an assembly.
Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from
port B.
Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from
port A.
Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow
out of port A.
Supply battery voltage to the terminal.
Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B.
Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-597.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF530Q
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-595
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0359
MEC972C
EC-596
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0360
GI
INSPECTION START
MA
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
GO TO 3.
EM
LC
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly.
Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and touch “ON”.
Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B.
Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF017Z
AX
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-597
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly.
Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass valve harness connector.
Supply battery voltage to the terminal.
Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B.
Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.
SEF914U
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
4
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging or disconnection.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair it.
5
CHECK EVAP PURGE PORT
Check EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Clean EVAP purge port.
EC-598
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Pinch the fresh air hose.
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B.
MA
EM
LC
AEC630A
FE
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister.
7
CL
MT
CHECK BYPASS HOSE
Check bypass hoses for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Repair or replace hoses.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-599
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF016Z
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF358X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
EC-600
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
GI
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE
Check vacuum cut valve as follows:
MA
EM
LC
SEF379Q
FE
a. Plug port C and D with fingers.
b. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
c. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
d. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
e. Open port C and D.
f. Blow air in port A check that air flows freely out of port C.
g. Blow air in port B check that air flows freely out of port D.
CL
MT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
Replace vacuum cut valve.
AT
TF
10
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
PD
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
Repair or replace.
AX
SU
11
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF495R
HA
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 12.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-601
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 13.
NG
©
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
13
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
EC-602
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
GI
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
MA
14
EM
LC
SEF337X
FE
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 15.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
15
1.
2.
3.
4.
CL
MT
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect harness disconnected connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF339X
SC
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 17.
NG
©
GO TO 16.
EL
IDX
EC-603
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
16
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform the Test No. 15 again.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 17.
NG
©
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
17
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-604
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0361
The malfunction information related to A/T (Automatic Transmission) is transferred through the line (circuit)
from TCM (Transmission control module) to ECM. Therefore, be sure to erase the malfunction information such
as DTC not only in TCM (Transmission control module) but also ECM after the A/T related repair.
GI
MA
EM
LC
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0363
Malfunction is detected when an incorrect signal from TCM (Transmission control module) is sent to ECM.
FE
CL
MT
Possible Cause
I
I
I
AT
NAEC0594
Harness or connectors
[The communication line circuit between ECM and TCM
(Transmission control module) is open or shorted.]
Dead (Weak) battery
TCM (Transmission control module)
TF
PD
AX
SU
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0364
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0364S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-445.
WITH GST
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
NAEC0364S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EL
IDX
EC-605
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0367
When the gear position is “P” (A/T models only) or “N”, park/neutral
position (PNP) switch is “ON”.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the
“ON” signal) exists.
For A/T models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly
also includes a transmission range switch to detect selector lever
position.
AEC877A
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0368
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
P/N POSI SW
CONDITION
I Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Shift lever: “P” or “N”
ON
Except above
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0683
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
44
WIRE
COLOR
L
(A/T)
ITEM
PNP switch
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Gear position is “P” or “N” (A/T models).
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Except the above gear position
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0370
Malfunction is detected when the signal of the park/neutral position
(PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and
driving.
Possible Cause
I
I
NAEC0595
Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or
shorted.]
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
EC-606
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0371
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
GI
MA
EM
LC
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
NAEC0371S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
Position (Selector lever)
Known-good signal
“N” and “P” position
ON
Except the above position
OFF
SEF212Y
3)
4)
5)
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-610.
If OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
1,500 - 2,500 rpm (A/T)
1,800 - 2,800 rpm (M/T)
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
3.6 - 12 msec
VHCL SPEED SE
70 - 100 km/h (43 - 62 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position
SEF213Y
6)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-610.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-607
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Overall Function Check
Overall Function Check
=NAEC0372
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral
position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
NAEC0372S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 44 and body ground
under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position)
Voltage V (Known-good data)
SEF359X
“P” and “N” position
Except the above position
3)
Approx. 0
Battery voltage
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-610.
EC-608
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0373
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC019D
EC-609
IDX
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
FOR M/T MODELS
1
NAEC0374
NAEC0374S03
CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
AEC877A
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
2
CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 44 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3
CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Refer to MT-6, MT-7, “Position Switch Check”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
4
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-610
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
FOR A/T MODELS
1
=NAEC0374S02
GI
CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEF011SA
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
Check harness for open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and engine ground.
3
MT
AT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
©
CL
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
TF
PD
CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 44 and PNP switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
AX
SU
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
BR
ST
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F22, M33 and M70, B50
I Harness for open or short between ECM and park/neutral position (PNP) switch
©
5
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
RS
BT
HA
Refer to AT-102, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-611
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-612
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Description
Description
NAEC0596
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Closed throttle position
Throttle valve idle position
NAEC0596S01
ECM function
Start signal
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Engine speed (REF signal)
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
MA
Actuator
EM
LC
VIAS control
Ignition switch
GI
VIAS control solenoid valve
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF447Z
When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power
valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the effective suction port
length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collector’s suction port including the intake valve. This long suction port
provides increased air intake which results in improved suction
efficiency and higher torque generation.
The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is
running at high speed, the ECM sends the signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold
vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore opens the
power valve to two suction passages together in the collector.
Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the
length of the suction port provided independently for each cylinder.
This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with
reduced suction resistance under high speeds.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-613
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Description (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Power Valve
NAEC0596S02
NAEC0596S0201
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used
to control the suction passage of the variable induction air control
system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the
power valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge
tank. The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valve.
SEF018Z
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve
NAEC0596S0202
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
SEF019Z
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0684
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
WIRE
COLOR
Y/G
ITEM
VIAS control solenoid
valve
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
EC-614
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0597
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC990C
EC-615
IDX
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0598
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
SEC304C
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Rev engine quickly up to above 5,000 rpm and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
SEF021Z
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
GO TO 2.
EC-616
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF019Z
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF603X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
3
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SU
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I 10A fuse
I Harness continuity between fuse and VIAS control solenoid valve
©
4
PD
Repair harness or connectors.
BR
ST
CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-617
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
RETEST OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform Test No. 1 again.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
GO TO 6.
6
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
OK or NG
OK
©
Replace VIAS control solenoid valve as intake manifold collector assembly.
NG
©
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EC-618
INJECTOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0383
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The
amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration.
Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The
ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel
needs.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF375Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0384
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
INJ PULSE-B2
INJ PULSE-B1
I
I
I
I
B/FUEL SCHDL
ditto
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
2.4 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm
1.9 - 2.8 msec
Idle
2.0 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm
1.4 - 2.6 msec
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
CL
MT
AT
NAEC0685
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
101
102
103
104
105
107
WIRE
COLOR
R/B
L/W
R/W
PU/R
R/Y
R/L
ITEM
Injector
Injector
Injector
Injector
Injector
Injector
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
1
5
2
6
3
4
FE
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
TF
PD
AX
SU
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-619
INJECTOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0386
MEC974C
EC-620
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0387
GI
INSPECTION START
MA
Turn ignition switch to “START”.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
GO TO 3.
2
EM
LC
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF190Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
GO TO 3.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-621
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
SEF023Z
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF364Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M33, F22
I Harness connectors F5, F100
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
©
5
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 103, 104, 107, 101, 105, 102. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 6.
EC-622
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F100, F5
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F5 and ECM
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F100 and injector
©
7
MA
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
EM
LC
1. Remove intake manifold collector.
2. Disconnect injector harness connectors.
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
FE
MTBL0483
CL
Continuity should exist.
MT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8
CHECK INJECTOR
AT
TF
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF964XB
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Replace injector.
9
ST
RS
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
BT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-623
START SIGNAL
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0388
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
START SIGNAL
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON
OFF , ON , OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0688
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
42
WIRE
COLOR
B/Y
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “START”]
9 - 12V
Start signal
EC-624
START SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
=NAEC0390
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC975C
EC-625
IDX
START SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0391
INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
GO TO 3.
2
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
SEF072Y
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
GO TO 4.
3
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 42 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF362X
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
GO TO 4.
4
CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then turn it to “START”.
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 5.
No
©
Refer to SC-10, “STARTING SYSTEM”.
EC-626
START SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
CHECK FUSE
GI
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect 7.5A fuse.
3. Check if 7.5A fuse is OK.
MA
5
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace 7.5A fuse.
6
LC
CHECK START SIGNAL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect ignition switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 42 and fuse block, ignition switch and fuse block. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
CL
AT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
©
FE
MT
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Fuse block (J/B) connectors M10, E3
I Harness for open or short between ignition switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
8
EM
TF
PD
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AX
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
SU
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-627
FUEL PUMP
System Description
System Description
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
Engine speed (REF signal)
Ignition switch
Start signal
NAEC0392
ECM function
Fuel pump
control
Actuator
Fuel pump relay
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine
startability. If the ECM receives a 120° signal from the crankshaft position sensor (REF), it knows that the
engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the 120° signal is not received when the ignition switch
is on, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving
safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn
controls the fuel pump.
Condition
Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON.
Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking
Operates.
When engine is stopped
Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above
Stops.
Component Description
NAEC0393
The fuel pump with a fuel damper is an in-tank type (the pump and
damper are located in the fuel tank).
SEF018S
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0394
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
FUEL PUMP RLY
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
I Ignition switch is turned to ON. (Operates for 1 second.)
I Engine running and cranking
ON
Except as shown above
OFF
EC-628
FUEL PUMP
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
=NAEC0686
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
28
WIRE
COLOR
R/L
GI
MA
EM
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
LC
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I For 1 second after turning ignition switch “ON”
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I 1 second passed after turning ignition switch
“ON”.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Fuel pump relay
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-629
FUEL PUMP
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0396
MEC976C
EC-630
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0397
GI
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
EM
LC
FE
SEF025Z
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned “ON”.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
CL
MT
AT
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY-1 and -2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay-1 and -2.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF346Z
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminals 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF347Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-631
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
I 15A fuse in fuse block (J/B)
I Harness connectors M1, E1
I Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay-1 and fuel pump relay-2
©
4
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY-1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
Check voltage between terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF348Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY-2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect fuel pump relay-2.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel pump relay-2 terminal 5 and fuel pump relay-1 terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-632
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect fuel pump relay-2.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between terminals 2, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF026Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
MT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
AT
Check the following.
I 15A fuse in fusible link and relay box
I Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay-2
©
CL
TF
Repair harness or connectors.
PD
8
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY-2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between fuel pump relay-2 terminal 1 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
©
AX
SU
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-633
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
SEF021S
3. Check harness continuity between fuel pump terminal 2 and body ground, fuel pump terminal 1 and fuel pump relay
terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 11.
NG
©
GO TO 10.
10
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check harness for open or short between fuel pump relay and fuel pump.
©
11
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 28 and fuel pump relay-1 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 13.
NG
©
GO TO 12.
12
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1
I Harness connectors M32, F23
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay-1
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-634
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
13
GI
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY-1 AND -2
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect fuel pump relay-1 and -2, fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector and ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Turn fuel pump relay-1, -2 “ON” and “OFF” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and check operating sound.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF073Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF608X
AX
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 14.
NG
©
Replace fuel pump relay.
14
SU
BR
CHECK FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 1 and 2.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF027Z
SC
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 15.
NG
©
Replace fuel pump.
EL
IDX
EC-635
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-636
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0398
The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load.
When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and
adjust for the increased load.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF028Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0399
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PW/ST SIGNAL
CONDITION
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
SPECIFICATION
Steering wheel in neutral position
(forward direction)
OFF
The steering wheel is fully turned.
ON
CL
MT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0687
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
WIRE
COLOR
R/B
ITEM
Power steering oil
pressure switch
FE
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
AT
TF
PD
[Engine is running]
I Steering wheel is being turned.
0 - 1.0V
AX
[Engine is running]
I Steering wheel is not being turned.
Approximately 5V
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-637
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0401
MEC977C
EC-638
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0402
GI
INSPECTION START
MA
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
GO TO 3.
EM
LC
2
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check “PW/ST SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF228Y
TF
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
GO TO 4.
3
PD
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
AX
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 47 and ground under the following conditions.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF363X
BT
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
GO TO 4.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-639
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector.
SEF028Z
3. Check harness continuity between power steering oil pressure switch terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5
CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 47 and power steering oil pressure switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6
CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine.
2. Check continuity between power steering oil pressure switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
SEF364X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Replace power steering oil pressure switch.
EC-640
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
MA
INSPECTION END
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-641
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Description
Description
NAEC0636
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the
air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
SEF029Z
SEF099XA
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0689
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
B/P
Sensors’ ground
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V
81
W/PU
Refrigerant pressure
sensor
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”.
(Compressor operates.)
1.0 - 3.88V
111
P/B
Sensors’ power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
58
EC-642
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0637
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC020D
EC-643
IDX
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0638
CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 81 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF617XA
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “OFF”.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
SEF029Z
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF030Z
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
EC-644
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1
I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
©
4
Repair harness or connectors.
MA
EM
CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
LC
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
FE
CL
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1 and M33, F22
I Harness connectors F23, M32
I Harness for open between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
I Harness for open between TCM (Transmission control module) and refrigerant pressure sensor
©
6
TF
CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
©
AX
SU
ST
RS
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to HA-15, “Refrigerant pressure sensor”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 9.
NG
©
Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
9
PD
BR
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1 and M94, F27
I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
8
AT
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 81 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
7
MT
BT
HA
SC
EL
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
IDX
INSPECTION END
EC-645
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0690
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
52
WIRE
COLOR
PU
ITEM
Electrical load signal
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
I Rear window defogger: ON
I Hi-beam headlamp: ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Electrical load: OFF
0V
EC-646
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0604
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC422D
EC-647
IDX
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
MEC423D
EC-648
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC026D
IDX
EC-649
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0605
CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 52 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF610X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
2
CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 52 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF611X
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
GO TO 7.
3
CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn “ON” the rear window defogger switch.
3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 4.
No
©
Refer to EL-170, “Rear Window Defogger”.
EC-650
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
Stop engine.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and rear window defogger relay terminal 7.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF031Z
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
MT
AT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1
I Harness connectors M33, F22
I Diode M37
I Harness for open and short between ECM and rear window defigger relay
©
TF
PD
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AX
6
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
7
INSPECTION END
SU
BR
CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn the lighting switch “ON” at 1st position with high beam.
3. Check that headlamps are illuminated.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Refer to EL-32, “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” or “EL-53, “HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) —
DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM”.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-651
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
Stop engine.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect headlamp LH relay. (Models for USA), daytime light control unit harness connector (Models for Canada).
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and headlamp LH relay terminal 5 or combination switch 9, 10
(without autolight system) under the following conditions.
SEF038Z
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and daytime light control unit terminal 5 (with autolight system for
Canada) or 6 (without autolight system for Canada) under the following conditions.
SEF039Z
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 10.
NG
©
GO TO 9.
9
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E1, M1
I Harness connectors M33, F22
I Diode E121, E122
I Harness for open and short between ECM and headlamp LH relay or daytime light control unit
©
10
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-142.
©
INSPECTION END
EC-652
MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0407
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC978C
EC-653
IDX
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure Regulator
Fuel Pressure Regulator
NAEC0408
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Vacuum hose is connected.
Approximately 235 (2.4, 34)
Vacuum hose is disconnected.
Approximately 294 (3.0, 43)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
Target idle speed*1
NAEC0409
No-load*2 (in “P” or N” position)
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm
Air conditioner: ON
In “P” or N” position
825 rpm or more
Ignition timing*1
In “P” or N” position
15°±5° BTDC
Throttle position sensor idle position
*1:
*2:
I
I
I
0.15 - 0.85V
Throttle position sensor harness connector connected
Under the following conditions:
Air conditioner switch: OFF
Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Supply voltage
NAEC0411
Battery voltage (11 - 14)V
Output voltage at idle
1.2 - 1.8*V
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater (front)
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
NAEC0412
NAEC0414
2.3 - 4.3Ω
Fuel Pump
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
NAEC0415
0.2 - 5.0Ω
IACV-AAC Valve
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)]
NAEC0416
Approximately 20 - 24Ω
Injector
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)]
NAEC0417
13.5 - 17.5Ω
Resistor
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
NAEC0418
Approximately 2.2 kΩ
EC-654
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Throttle Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor
Throttle valve conditions
NAEC0419
GI
Voltage
(at normal operating temperature,
engine off, ignition switch ON,
throttle opener disengaged)
MA
0.15 - 0.85V
EM
Completely closed (a)
Partially open
Between (a) and (b)
Completely open (b)
LC
3.5 - 4.7V
Calculated Load Value
NAEC0420
Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
At idle
14.0 - 33.0
At 2,500 rpm
12.0 - 25.0
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Temperature °C (°F)
FE
CL
NAEC0421
Resistance kΩ
MT
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
80 (176)
0.27 - 0.38
AT
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater (rear)
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
NAEC0422
TF
2.3 - 4.3Ω
Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF)
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)]
NAEC0423
PD
470 - 570Ω
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
Temperature °C (°F)
AX
NAEC0424
Resistance kΩ
SU
20 (68)
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
0.79 - 0.90
BR
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
HITACHI make
1,440 - 1,760Ω
MITSUBISHI make
2,090 - 2,550Ω
NAEC0639
ST
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)]
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-655
NOTES
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising